Lenovo Server 387 User Manual
ThinkServer  
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Machine Types: 0387, 0388, 0389, 0390, 0391, 0392, 0393, and 0441  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Selecting a startup device  
Exiting the Setup Utility program .  
Updating or recovering the BIOS.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66  
67  
67  
69  
Introduction .  
.
.
.
.
Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program .  
Features of the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
program  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70  
Chapter 2. Server setup road map . . . 5  
Chapter 3. Product overview . . . . . . 7  
Starting the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
program  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70  
71  
72  
73  
Configuring RAID.  
About RAID .  
Server package .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
7
Features .  
Specifications .  
Software .  
.
.
.
.
.
RAID for your server.  
12  
12  
12  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
Configuring RAID using the ThinkServer  
EasyStartup program .  
Configuring the onboard SATA software  
RAID.  
Configuring the advanced SATA or SAS  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
74  
74  
ThinkServer EasyStartup .  
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater  
BIOS and BMC firmware update utility  
RAID configuration utilities .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
hardware RAID .  
Configuring the Ethernet controllers  
Updating the firmware.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79  
80  
80  
81  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PC-Doctor for DOS .  
Locations. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Firmware Updater program .  
Machine type, model, and serial number  
label .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13  
15  
17  
18  
19  
22  
25  
32  
33  
34  
42  
46  
50  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or  
replacing hardware . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Front view of the server  
Front panel .  
DIT module .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Guidelines  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83  
83  
84  
84  
85  
85  
87  
89  
89  
93  
96  
98  
Precautions .  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
System reliability guidelines.  
Rear view of the server  
Server locks .  
Server components .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Working inside the server with the power on .  
Hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs  
RAID card.  
Removing the server cover .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing and reinstalling the front bezel .  
Installing, removing, or replacing hardware  
Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane .  
System board components .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing or removing a memory module.  
Installing or removing a PCI card.  
Installing or removing the Ethernet card .  
Installing or removing the RAID card  
System board jumpers.  
System board LEDs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4. Turning on and turning off  
the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer 9240-8i  
RAID 5 Upgrade Key  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer SATA  
Software RAID 5 Key  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer iKVM  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
100  
102  
Turning on the server .  
Turning off the server .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53  
53  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Configuring the server . . 55  
Remote Management Module .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
105  
109  
111  
115  
Using the Setup Utility program .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
55  
55  
Installing or removing the TPM module .  
Installing or removing the DIT module .  
Installing or replacing an optical drive .  
Starting the Setup Utility program  
.
.
Viewing information in the Setup Utility  
program  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
55  
56  
64  
65  
66  
Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk  
drive .  
Removing or installing a non-hot-swap hard  
disk drive .  
Setup Utility program interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
119  
123  
Setting the system date and time  
Using passwords .  
Configuring the TPM function .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the hot-swap hard disk drive  
backplane.  
Replacing the non-hot-swap power supply  
Adapters and miscellaneous FRUs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
194  
196  
204  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
133  
137  
140  
Power cords  
Shipgroup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
assembly .  
Replacing a hot-swap redundant power  
supply module .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 9. Getting information, help,  
and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the power distribution board and  
cage assembly .  
Replacing the front panel board assembly .  
Information resources .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
213  
213  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143  
147  
149  
152  
154  
157  
161  
162  
168  
Using the documentation.  
ThinkServer Web site  
(http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver) .  
Replacing the front system fan  
Replacing the rear system fan .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
213  
213  
214  
214  
214  
215  
215  
Lenovo Support Web site.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the heat sink and fan assembly .  
Help and service .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the microprocessor .  
Replacing the system board battery  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Before you call .  
Calling for service.  
Replacing the system board  
.
.
.
.
.
Using other services  
Completing the parts replacement .  
Purchasing additional services  
Reinstalling the server cover and reconnecting  
cables .  
Updating the server configuration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
168  
170  
Appendix A. Notices. . . . . . . . . 217  
Trademarks .  
Important notes .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
218  
218  
218  
218  
219  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting and  
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) cable and cord notice .  
Recycling information .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Troubleshooting procedure .  
Viewing the status and diagnostic LEDs.  
Using the diagnostic program.  
Viewing the system event log .  
Basic troubleshooting tables .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
171  
171  
172  
172  
172  
Battery return program.  
Requirement for batteries containing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
perchlorate .  
Particulate contamination  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
220  
220  
Important information for the European Directive  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
2002/96/EC .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
221  
problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
172  
173  
174  
176  
176  
177  
Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive  
Optical drive problems.  
(RoHS) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
224  
225  
225  
226  
226  
Hard disk drive problems.  
China RoHS .  
Memory module problems .  
Turkish statement of compliance .  
Keyboard, mouse, or USB device problems .  
POST error codes. .  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement.  
Electronic emission notices. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Statement.  
Chapter 8. FRU lists . . . . . . . . . 179  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
226  
Major FRUs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179  
189  
Mechanical FRUs  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
ii ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
Note: Before using the product, be sure to read and understand the multilingual safety instructions on the  
documentation DVD that comes with the product.  
Antes de usar o produto, leia e entenda as instruções de segurança multilíngues no DVD de documentação  
que o acompanha.  
Преди да използвате този продукт, задължително прочетете и вникнете в многоезичните инструкции  
за безопасност в DVD диска с документация, който се предоставя с продукта.  
Prije upotrebe ovog proizvoda obavezno pročitajte višejezične sigurnosne upute koje se nalaze na DVD-u s  
dokumentacijom koji dobivate uz proizvod.  
Před použitím produktu je třeba si přečíst a porozumět bezpečnostním pokynům uvedeným na disku DVD s  
dokumentací, který je dodáván s produktem.  
Før du bruger produktet, skal du sørge for at læse og forstå de sikkerhedsforskrifter, der findes på flere  
sprog, på den dokumentations-dvd, der følger med produktet.  
Lue tuotteen mukana toimitetulla DVD-tietolevyllä olevat monikieliset turvaohjeet ennen tämän tuotteen  
käyttöä.  
Avant d'utiliser le produit, veillez à bien lire et comprendre les instructions de sécurité multilingues figurant  
sur le DVD de documentation fourni avec le produit.  
Πριν χρησιμοποιήσετε το προϊόν, βεβαιωθείτε ότι έχετε διαβάσει και κατανοήσει τις οδηγίες ασφάλειας, οι  
οποίες είναι διαθέσιμες σε διάφορες γλώσσες στο DVD τεκμηρίωσης που συνοδεύει το προϊόν.  
Vor Verwendung des Produkts sollten Sie unbedingt die mehrsprachigen Sicherheitsanweisungen auf der  
Dokumentations-DVD lesen, die im Lieferumfang des Produkts enthalten ist.  
A termék használata előtt mindenképpen olvassa el és értelmezze a termékhez kapott dokumentációs DVD  
lemezen található, több nyelven elolvasható biztonsági előírásokat.  
Prima di utilizzare il prodotto, accertarsi di leggere e comprendere le informazioni sulla sicurezza multilingue  
disponibili sul DVD di documentazione fornito con il prodotto.  
製品をご使用になる前に、製品に付属の Documentation DVD に収録されているマルチリンガルの「安  
全に正しくご使用いただくために」を読んで理解してください。  
제품을 사용하기 전에 제품과 함께 제공되는 문서 DVD의 다국어 안전 지침을 주의 깊게 읽어보십시오.  
Voordat u het product gebruikt, moet u ervoor zorgen dat u de meertalige veiligheidsinstructies op de  
documentatie-dvd van het product hebt gelezen en begrijpt.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Przed skorzystaniem z produktu należy zapoznać się z wielojęzycznymi instrukcjami bezpieczeństwa  
znajdującymi się na płycie DVD z dokumentacją dostarczoną wraz z produktem.  
Antes de utilizar o produto, leia atentamente as instruções de segurança multilingues que constam no  
DVD de documentação fornecido com o produto.  
Înainte de a utiliza produsul, asiguraţi-vă că aţi citit şi înţeles instrucţiunile de siguranţă în mai multe limbi de  
pe DVD-ul cu documentaţie care însoţeşte produsul.  
Før du bruker produktet, må du lese og forstå den flerspråklige sikkerhetsinformasjonen på DVDen med  
dokumentasjon som følger med produktet.  
Прежде чем использовать этот продукт, внимательно ознакомьтесь с инструкциями по технике  
безопасности на разных языках, которые можно найти на DVD-диске с документацией в комплекте с  
продуктом.  
在使用本产品之前，请务必先阅读和了解产品附带的文档 DVD 中的多语言安全说明。  
Pre nego to upotrebite proizvod obavezno paljivo proitajte i prouite viejeziko uputstvo za bezbednost na  
dokumentacionom DVD-u koji ste dobili uz proizvod.  
Pred pouvanm produktu si pretajte viacjazyn bezpenostn pokyny na disku DVD s dokumentciou dodanom s  
produktom.  
Preden začnete uporabljati izdelek, je pomembno, da preberete in razumete večjezična varnostna navodila  
na DVD-ju z dokumentacijo, ki ste ga prejeli skupaj z izdelkom.  
Antes de utilizar el producto, asegúrese de leer y comprender las instrucciones de seguridad multilingües del  
DVD de documentación que se proporciona con el producto.  
Var noga med att läsa säkerhetsinstruktionerna på dokumentations-DVD-skivan som följer med produkten  
innan du börjar använda produkten.  
使用本產品之前，請務必閱讀並瞭解產品隨附的文件 DVD 上的多國語言版本安全資訊。  
Bu ürünü kullanmadan önce, ürünle birlikte gönderilen belge DVD'si üzerindeki çok dil içeren güvenlik  
yönergelerini okuyup anladýðýnýzdan emin olun.  
Перед використанням цього продукту уважно ознайомтеся з інструкціями з техніки безпеки на різних  
мовах, що можна знайти на DVD-диску з документацією в комплекті з продуктом.  
Important: The caution and danger statements in this document are labeled with numbers. Each number  
identifies an English-language caution or danger statement that refers to translated versions of the caution  
or danger statement in the Safety Information document. For example, if a danger statement is labeled  
“Statement 1,” translations for this danger statement are in the Safety Information document under  
“Statement 1.”  
Ensure that you read and understand all caution and danger statements in this document before you perform  
the procedures. Read and understand any additional safety information that is included with the server or  
optional device before you install, remove, or replace the device.  
iv ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 1  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
• Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
• Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.  
• Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product.  
• When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.  
• Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.  
• Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you  
open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
• Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when installing, moving, or opening  
covers on this product or attached devices.  
To connect:  
To disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn devices ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Statement 2  
DANGER  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
When replacing the lithium coin cell battery, use only the same or an equivalent type that is  
recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
• Throw or immerse into water  
• Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
• Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 3  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
• Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Statement 4  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
< 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
< 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
< 100 kg (220.5 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power  
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected  
from the power source.  
vi ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 6  
CAUTION:  
If you install a strain-relief bracket option over the end of the power cord that is connected to the  
device, you must connect the other end of the power cord to a power source that is easily accessible  
in case it needs to be disconnected.  
Statement 7  
CAUTION:  
If the device has doors, ensure that you remove or secure the doors before moving or lifting the  
device to protect against personal injury. The doors will not support the weight of the device.  
Statement 8  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Statement 9  
CAUTION:  
Disconnect the hot-swap fan cables before removing the fan from the device to protect against  
personal injury.  
Statement 10  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates a sharp-edge hazard.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 11  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates a potential heat hazard.  
Statement 12  
DANGER  
Overloading a branch circuit is a potential fire hazard and a shock hazard under certain conditions. To  
avoid these hazards, ensure that your system electrical requirements do not exceed branch current ratings  
at the installation site.  
Statement 13  
CAUTION:  
Ensure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server unit is extended on the rails.  
Statement 14  
CAUTION:  
Some accessory or option board outputs exceed Class 2 or limited power source limits. You  
must install the appropriate interconnecting cabling in accordance with your local electrical code  
requirements.  
Statement 15  
CAUTION:  
The power-control button on the device may put the device in standby mode instead of turning off  
the device. In addition, the device might have multiple connections to dc power. To remove all  
electrical current from the device, ensure that all connections to dc power are disconnected at  
the dc power input terminals.  
viii ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 16  
CAUTION:  
To reduce the risk of electric shock or energy hazards:  
• This equipment must be installed by trained service personnel in a restricted-access location, as  
defined by your local electrical code and the latest edition of IEC 60950.  
• Connect the equipment to a reliably earthed safety extra low voltage (SELV) source. An SELV  
source is a secondary circuit that is designed so that normal and single fault conditions do not  
cause the voltages to exceed a safe level (60 V direct current).  
• The branch circuit overcurrent protection must be rated in accordance with local electrical code  
requirements.  
• Use 1.3 mm2 or 16 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper conductor only, not exceeding 3 meters  
in length.  
• Torque the wiring-terminal screws to 1.4 newton-meters or 12 inch-pounds.  
• Provide a readily available, approved and rated disconnect device in the field wiring.  
Statement 17  
CAUTION:  
This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
Statement 18  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted products.  
Statement 19  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 20  
CAUTION:  
A lithium ion battery is provided. To avoid possible explosion, do not burn the battery. Replace the  
battery only with the Lenovo-approved part. Recycle or discard the battery as instructed by local  
regulations.  
x
ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. General information  
This chapter provides some general information about your product.  
This chapter contains the following items:  
•
•
“Introduction” on page 1  
“Server documentation” on page 1  
Introduction  
This Hardware Maintenance Manual for your Lenovo® ThinkServer® product contains information about the  
server features, specifications, component locations, configuration instructions, hardware replacement  
procedures, parts listing, and troubleshooting and diagnostics.  
Note: The Hardware Maintenance Manual is intended only for trained service personnel of Lenovo. The  
Hardware Maintenance Manual is updated frequently, and the most up-to-date version is always available in  
English on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
This document contains instructions on how to install, remove, or replace Customer Replaceable Units  
(CRUs) and Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).  
Replaceable components are of three types:  
• Self-service CRUs: Self-service CRUs are easy to install and customers are responsible for replacing all  
Self-service CRUs. If a Lenovo service technician installs a Self-service CRU at your request, you will be  
charged for the installation.  
• Optional-service CRUs: Although dealing with Optional-service CRUs requires some technical skills,  
Optional-service CRUs are safe for customers to replace. You may install an Optional-service CRU  
yourself or request Lenovo to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service that  
is designated for the server.  
• FRUs: FRUs must be replaced only by trained service technicians.  
Notes:  
1. Before servicing a Lenovo product, be sure to read and understand the “Safety information” on page iii.  
2. For information about the terms of warranty, refer to the Warranty and Support Information on the  
documentation DVD that comes with the server. The Warranty and Support Information is also available  
on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
To obtain the most up-to-date information about the server, go to:  
http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver  
Lenovo maintains pages on the World Wide Web, where you can get the latest technical information and  
download documentation or device drivers and updates. To access the Lenovo Support Web site, go to:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
Server documentation  
This topic provides general descriptions of the various documentation for your server and instructions on  
how to obtain all the documentation.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Printed documents  
The following documents are printed out and contained in your server package.  
• Read Me First  
This is a multilingual document you should read first. This document guides you to read the complete  
warranty, support, and safety information on the documentation DVD that comes with your server before  
using the product. This document also provides information about how to find the most up-to-date  
information on the Lenovo Support Web site.  
• Important Notices  
This document includes safety and legal notices that you should read and understand before using  
the server.  
Documentation DVD  
The documentation DVD, which comes with your server, contains various documents for your server in  
Portable Document Format (PDF). To view the documentation, you need to have the Adobe Reader program  
installed. You can download the desired language version of the latest Adobe Reader program from the  
Adobe Web site at:  
http://www.adobe.com  
Note: Lenovo maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information  
and download documentation or device drivers and updates. Some information in the documents on the  
documentation DVD might change without notice after the first release of the DVD. You can always obtain all  
the most up-to-date documentation for your server from the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
The following documents are on the documentation DVD that comes with your server:  
• Safety Information  
This is a multilingual document that includes all the safety statements for your product in more than 30  
languages. Be sure to read and understand all the safety statements before using the product.  
• Warranty and Support Information  
This document includes the Lenovo warranty statement, CRUs information, and information about how  
to contact Lenovo Support.  
• User Guide  
This document provides detailed information to help you get familiar with your server and help you use,  
configure, and maintain your server.  
• Remote Management Module User Guide  
This document provides information to help you use the integrated Keyboard, Video, and Mouse (iKVM)  
function for server remote management. This document is in English only.  
Note: A ThinkServer iKVM Remote Management Module (hereinafter referred to as the iKVM key) is  
required and this option should be installed on the iKVM key connector on the system board to enable  
the iKVM function.  
2
ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide  
This document provides information about Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) and how to  
use the utility programs to configure, monitor, and maintain your server RAID and related devices. This  
document is in English only.  
Note: Refer to this document for hardware RAID information if you have a required RAID card installed in  
the server. See “Installing or removing the RAID card” on page 98. For information about the onboard  
SATA software RAID, see “Configuring the onboard SATA software RAID” on page 74.  
Document for trained service personnel only  
The following document is intended for trained service personnel of Lenovo and is only available in English  
on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
This document provides diagnostic information, parts listing, and replacement procedures for all field  
replaceable units (FRUs, parts replaced by trained service personnel) as well as all CRUs.  
Chapter 1. General information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
4
ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Server setup road map  
This chapter provides a general road map to guide you through setting up your server.  
The server setup procedure varies depending on the configuration of the server when it was delivered. In  
some cases, the server is fully configured and you just need to connect the server to the network and an  
ac power source, and then you can turn on the server. In other cases, the server needs to have hardware  
features installed, requires hardware and firmware configuration, and requires an operating system to  
be installed.  
The general procedure for setting up your server is:  
1. Unpack the server package. See “Server package” on page 7.  
2. Install any required hardware or server option. See the related topic in Chapter 6 “Installing, removing,  
or replacing hardware” on page 83.  
3. Connect the Ethernet cable and power cord(s) to the server. See “Rear view of the server” on page  
19 to locate the connectors.  
4. Turn on the server to verify operation. See “Turning on the server” on page 53.  
5. Review the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) settings and customize as needed. See “Using  
the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
6. Configure RAID and install the operating system and basic drivers. See “Using the ThinkServer  
EasyStartup program” on page 69 and “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
7. Install any additional drivers needed for added features. Refer to the instructions that come with the  
hardware option.  
8. Configure Ethernet settings in the operating system by referring to the operating system help. This step  
is not required if the operating system was installed using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program.  
9. Check for firmware and driver updates. See “Updating the firmware” on page 80.  
10. Install other applications. Refer to the documentation that comes with the applications that you want to  
install.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. Product overview  
This chapter provides information about the server package, features, specifications, software programs,  
and component locations.  
This chapter contains the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
“Server package” on page 7  
“Features” on page 7  
“Specifications” on page 12  
“Software” on page 12  
“Locations” on page 13  
Server package  
The server package includes the server, power cord(s), printed documentation, documentation DVD, and  
software media.  
Figure 1. Server package  
1 Server  
2 Material box, including power cord(s), printed documentation, documentation DVD, and software media  
Features  
This topic provides general information about the server features for a variety of models. Depending on your  
specific model, some features might vary or not be available. For information about your specific model, use  
the Setup Utility program. See “Viewing information in the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Microprocessor  
Your server comes with one of the following microprocessors (internal cache size varies by model):  
• Intel® Xeon® quad-core microprocessor  
• Intel Xeon dual-core microprocessor  
• Intel Core™ i3 microprocessor  
For a list of the ThinkServer microprocessor options, go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver. Click the  
Products tab and then click Options ➙ ThinkServer Processors to view the information.  
Memory  
Your server supports up to four double data rate 3 unbuffered dual inline memory modules (DDR3 UDIMMs)  
with Error Checking and Correcting (ECC) technology.  
• Supports 2 GB and 4 GB 1333 MHz DDR3 UDIMMs  
• Single-rank or dual-rank  
• Minimum system memory: 2 GB (only one 2 GB memory module installed in the DIMMA2 slot)  
• Maximum system memory: 16 GB (one 4 GB memory module installed in each of the four memory slots)  
For more information, see “System board components” on page 42 and “Memory module installation  
rules” on page 90.  
Power supply  
Your server comes with one of the following power supply configurations:  
• One screw-secured, non-hot-swap 400-watt power supply (80 Plus Bronze Compliant and universal input)  
• One or two hot-swap 450-watt redundant power supply modules (80 Plus Gold Compliant and universal  
input)  
Fans  
You server comes with the following fans to provide proper system cooling and airflow:  
• One heat sink and fan assembly  
• One or two front system fans depending on the model  
• One rear system fan  
8
ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Internal drives  
Internal drives are devices that your server uses to read and store data. The internal drives supported  
by your server vary by model.  
• Hard disk drive  
– Five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) or Serial Attached  
SCSI (SAS) hard disk drives (SCSI is the acronym for Small Computer System Interface)  
– Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard disk drives  
– Up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap SATA or SAS hard disk drives  
– Up to four 3.5-inch non-hot-swap SATA hard disk drives  
Note: For server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use SAS hard disk drives,  
there must be a required RAID card installed. See “RAID card” on page 33.  
• Optical drive  
– Up to two 5.25-inch SATA optical drives (DVD-ROM or DVD Burner / CD-RW Rambo 8)  
– The lower optical drive bay is installed with a 5.25-inch SATA optical drive (DVD-ROM or DVD Burner /  
CD-RW Rambo 8). The upper optical drive bay is for a Removable Disk Technology (RDX) Universal  
Serial Bus (USB) drive bundle.  
For the location information about the internal drives or drive bays, see “Server components” on page  
25. For information about the RDX USB drive bundle and instructions on how to install it, refer to the  
documentation that comes with the RDX USB drive bundle. In your server, the P6 power connector of the  
power supply is for the RDX USB drive bundle. You can purchase this option directly from Lenovo. The  
option name is Lenovo Removable Disk Technology (RDX) USB Drive Bundle. The RDX technology combines  
the characteristics of tape backup with disk storage to help you protect and archive data.  
Expansion slots  
The server has four expansion slots on the system board. For detailed information, see “System board  
components” on page 42.  
Input/Output (I/O) features  
• One Video Graphics Array (VGA) DB-15 connector on the rear panel  
• Six USB 2.0 connectors (two on the front panel and four on the rear panel)  
• Two RJ-45 Ethernet connectors on the rear panel  
• Two serial connectors (one fully-functional serial connector on the rear panel and one internal serial  
connector on the system board for optional use)  
For the location information about the connectors, refer to the related topic in “Locations” on page 13.  
Video subsystem  
An integrated graphics controller in the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) chip on the system board  
to support a VGA DB-15 connector on the rear panel for connecting video devices  
Ethernet connectivity  
The server comes with an integrated Intel Gigabit Ethernet controller as well as an Ethernet physical layer  
(PHY) of the Open Systems Interconnection model (OSI model). They provide the server with the ability  
to support two Ethernet connectors on the rear panel with 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps network  
connectivity. For more information, see “Rear view of the server” on page 19.  
Chapter 3. Product overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
         
Reliability, availability, and serviceability  
Reliability, availability, and serviceability (hereinafter referred to as RAS) are three important server design  
features. The RAS features help you to ensure the integrity of the data stored on the server, the availability of  
the server when you need it, and the ease with which you can diagnose and correct problems.  
Your server has the following RAS features:  
• Security features  
– Server locks (see “Server locks” on page 22)  
– Administrator password and user password to help protect unauthorized access to the server (see  
“Using passwords” on page 65)  
– Trusted Platform Module (TPM) connector on the system board for a TPM module, which is a security  
chip, to help protect your server and strengthen server security  
Note: The TPM module is only available in some models.  
– Remote monitoring or control by an administrator to provide protection or help  
– Hot-swap redundant power supply modules to help you avoid significant interruption to the operation  
of the system when a power supply module fails (available in some models)  
• Basic system management features  
– Ability to store the power-on self-test (POST) hardware test results  
– BIOS Setup Utility program  
The BIOS Setup Utility program helps you view the server information and configure the server in the  
pre-operating system environment. See “Using the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
– BMC and Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) 2.0  
The system board platform management subsystem is based on the integrated BMC features. The  
BMC is a management chip that is integrated on the system board of your server. With the BMC chip,  
no matter what condition the server operating system is in and no matter if the server is on or off, as long  
as the server is connected to network and an ac power source, the interaction with the BMC controlled  
servers can be achieved through system network. The user can obtain the server hardware health  
information and system event log (SEL), and is able to conduct the operations including turning on or  
off the server, restarting the server, locking the power switch on the front panel, and so on. This part of  
the server management is independent of the operating system and is called out-of-band management.  
The system board platform management subsystem consists of the integrated BMC, communication  
buses, sensors, Basic Input Output System (BIOS), and server management firmware. It is responsible  
for error management and reporting, system power control, thermal monitoring, system fan control,  
and other management features. The BMC provides system management and monitoring features  
based on the IPMI 2.0 specification. IPMI helps lower the overall costs of server management. You can  
find more information about IPMI 2.0 from the Web site of Intel. The BMC also supports some non-IPMI  
features, such as the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and the Platform Environment  
Control Interface (PECI), to provide more system management functions.  
Refer to the Remote Management Module User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your  
server for more information.  
– Hot-swap feature  
Some models support hot-swap hard disk drives and or hot-swap redundant power supply modules.  
With the hot-swap feature, you can install, remove, or replace hard disk drives or a failing power supply  
module without turning off the server.  
10 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Preboot Execution Environment (PXE)  
The Intel PXE technology enables you to boot your computers, load an operating system, or deploy  
executable images from a remote server by using a network interface. The operation can be done  
independently of local data storage devices (such as hard disk drives) or installed operating systems.  
– Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID)  
Your server supports onboard SATA software RAID and advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID  
configurations if you have a required RAID card installed. For detailed information, see “Configuring  
RAID” on page 71.  
– Status light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and diagnostic LEDs  
For more information about the LEDs for your server, refer to the related topics in “Locations” on  
page 13.  
– ThinkServer EasyStartup program and ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater program  
For more information about the software programs, see “Software” on page 12.  
– Wake on LAN  
When the Wake on LAN feature is enabled on a computer that is connected to a local area network  
(LAN), a network administrator can remotely turn on or wake up the computer from a management  
console using remote network management software. Besides, many other functions, such as data  
transfer and software updates, can be performed remotely without remote attendance and can be done  
after normal working hours and on weekends to save time and increase productivity.  
• Advanced system management features  
The BMC firmware supports the following advanced system management features:  
Note: The advanced system management features are only available when the BMC detects the presence  
of an integrated keyboard, video, and mouse (iKVM) key. The iKVM key is a remote management module.  
You can purchase an iKVM key from Lenovo and install it on the iKVM key connector on the system board  
of your server to enable the iKVM function and activate the advanced system management features.  
– iKVM redirection  
The BMC firmware supports iKVM redirection over LAN. This feature is available remotely from the  
embedded Web server. The remote management module can digitize and compress the collected  
keyboard, video, and mouse signals from the host system and then send them to the remote console.  
Meanwhile, it is easily accessible by remote KVM and controllable through LAN or Internet. For detailed  
information, refer to the Remote Management Module User Guide on the documentation DVD that  
comes with your server.  
– Media redirection  
The embedded Web server provides a Java JNLP to enable the remote media redirection. This is used  
in conjunction with the remote KVM feature or as a standalone applet.  
The media redirection feature is intended to enable system administrators or users to mount a remote  
optical drive, floppy drive, or USB flash disk as a USB device to the server. Once mounted, the remote  
device functions as a local device to the server, enabling system administrators or users to boot the  
server and install software (including operating systems), copy files, update the BIOS from this device.  
– Web Services for Management (WS-MAN)  
The BMC firmware supports the WS-MAN specification.  
– Local Directory Authentication Protocol (LDAP)  
The BMC firmware supports the LDAP for user authentication.  
Note: The IPMI users, passwords, and sessions are not supported over LDAP.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Embedded Web server  
The BMC provides an embedded Web server for out-of-band management. The user authentication is  
handled by IPMI user names and passwords. For more information, refer to the Remote Management  
Module User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server.  
Specifications  
This topic lists the physical specifications for your server.  
Dimensions  
Width: 195 mm (7.68 inches)  
Height: 430 mm (16.93 inches) without foot stands; 445 mm (17.52 inches) with foot stands  
Depth: 595 mm (23.43 inches) including the front bezel  
Weight  
The product weight varies depending on different system configurations.  
Range of product weight without package: 19 kg (41.89 lb) to 28 kg (61.73 lb)  
Range of product package weight: 2.8 kg (6.17 lb) to 3.5 kg (7.72 lb)  
Environment  
• Air temperature:  
Operating: 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F)  
Storage: -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F) in original shipping package  
• Altitude: 0 to 3 048 m (0 to 10 000 ft)  
• Humidity:  
Operating: 8% to 80% (non-condensing)  
Storage: 8% to 90% (non-condensing)  
Electrical input  
Universal input:  
Minimum: 90 V ac  
Maximum: 264 V ac  
Input frequency range: 47 to 63 Hz  
Software  
This topic provides information about the software programs that you can use to help you set up, use,  
and maintain the server.  
ThinkServer EasyStartup  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring RAID and installing supported  
Microsoft® Windows® and Linux® operating systems and device drivers on your server. This program is  
provided with your server on a self-starting (bootable) ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD. The user guide for  
the program is also on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the program interface. For detailed  
information, see “Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on page 69.  
12 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater  
The ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater program (hereinafter referred to as the Firmware Updater  
program) enables you to maintain your server firmware up-to-date and helps you avoid unnecessary server  
outages. The Firmware Updater program is provided on the Lenovo Support Web site. For more information  
about downloading and using the Firmware Updater program, see “Updating the firmware” on page 80.  
BIOS and BMC firmware update utility  
The BIOS and BMC firmware keeps updating after the shipment of the server. Lenovo maintains pages  
on the Support Web site and provides the BIOS and BMC firmware update utility with instructions for  
download to help you update the BIOS and BMC firmware if needed. For more information, see “Updating or  
recovering the BIOS” on page 67 and or “Updating the firmware” on page 80.  
RAID configuration utilities  
Your server supports onboard SATA software RAID and advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID configurations  
if you have a required RAID card installed. For detailed information, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
PC-Doctor for DOS  
The PC-Doctor for DOS is a diagnostic tool that you can use to test and gather information about your system  
in order to ensure your system is working correctly and resolve any hardware issues. You can download  
the latest version of this diagnostic program from http://support.lenovo.com and create a self-starting  
DOS-based diagnostic utility that you can use to detect failing hardware components independently of the  
operating system. For more information, see “Using the diagnostic program” on page 172.  
Locations  
This topic provides information to help you locate your server components.  
Machine type, model, and serial number label  
This topic helps you locate the two labels that contain the machine type, model, and serial number  
information for your server. The two labels are the same. One is on the front bezel and the other is on  
the chassis.  
The machine type, model, and serial number identify your server. When you contact Lenovo for help, the  
information helps support technicians to identify your server and provide faster service.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
The following illustration is a sample of the machine type, model, and serial number labels on the server.  
Note: Depending on the model type, your server might look slightly different from the illustration in this topic.  
Figure 2. Machine type, model, and serial number labels  
14 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front view of the server  
This topic provides information to help you locate the parts on the front of the server.  
The following illustration shows the front view of the server.  
2
1
CPU  
MEM  
PSU  
Figure 3. Front view of the server  
1 Front panel  
6 Front door  
7 Front door lock  
2 Optical drive bay 2 (with an optical drive installed  
in some models)  
8 Front door handle  
3 Optical drive bay 1 (with an optical drive installed)  
4 Optical drive eject/close button  
9 Doctor Inside Technology (DIT) panel (available in some  
models)  
5 Optical drive status LED  
1 Front panel  
For detailed information about the control, connectors, and status LEDs on the front panel, see “Front  
panel” on page 17.  
2 Optical drive bay 2  
The 5.25-inch optical drive bay 2 is for a secondary optical drive or a RDX USB drive bundle (server option).  
Some models have a secondary optical drive installed.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Optical drive bay 1  
Your server comes with an optical drive installed in the 5.25-inch optical drive bay 1.  
4 Optical drive eject/close button  
Press this button to eject or close the optical drive when the server power is on.  
5 Optical drive status LED  
The optical drive status LED is blinking in green when the optical drive is working or in the POST process.  
6 Front door  
7 Front door lock  
You can lock the front door to protect the hard disk drive cages from unauthorized access.  
8 Front door handle  
The front door handle helps you to open the front door.  
9 DIT panel  
The DIT panel is only available in models that come with a DIT module. For more information, see “DIT  
module” on page 18.  
16 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front panel  
This topic provides information to help you locate the control, connectors, and LEDs on the front panel of  
the server.  
The following illustration shows the control, connectors, and LEDs on the front panel of the server.  
Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the following illustration.  
Figure 4. Front panel  
1 Power switch with power status LED  
2 Hard disk drive status LED  
5 System status LED  
6 Front USB connector 1  
7 Front USB connector 2  
3 Network Interface Controller (NIC) 1 status LED  
4 NIC 2 status LED  
1 Power switch with power status LED  
You can press the power switch to turn on the server when you finish setting up the server. You can also  
hold the power switch for several seconds to turn off the server if you cannot turn off the server from the  
operating system. See Chapter 4 “Turning on and turning off the server” on page 53. The power status LED  
helps you to determine the current power status.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Power status LED  
Description  
Color  
Green  
None  
Green  
The server is on.  
The server is off.  
On  
Off  
Blinking  
The server is in ACPI S1 mode, which is also known  
as Power On Suspend (POS) mode. In this mode, the  
microprocessor is not working while other hardware  
devices are still working.  
2 Hard disk drive status LED  
The hard disk drive status LED helps you to determine the status of the hard disk drive activity.  
Hard disk drive status LED  
Description  
Color  
None  
Green  
The hard disk drive is not in use.  
Off  
Blinking  
The hard disk drive is active and data is being  
transferred.  
3 NIC 1 status LED  
4 NIC 2 status LED  
The two NIC status LEDs indicate the LAN status for the Ethernet connector 1 and Ethernet connector 2  
on the rear panel of the server.  
Description  
The server is connected to a LAN.  
The server is disconnected from a LAN.  
The LAN is connected and active.  
NIC status LED  
Color  
Green  
None  
Green  
On  
Off  
Blinking  
5 System status LED  
The system status LED helps you to determine if there are any system errors.  
Description  
A system error has occurred.  
System status LED  
Color  
Amber  
None  
On  
Off  
The server is off or the server is on and is working  
correctly.  
6 Front USB connector 1  
7 Front USB connector 2  
Used to attach a device that requires a USB connector, such as a USB keyboard, a USB mouse, a USB  
scanner, or a USB printer. If you have more than six USB devices, you can purchase a USB hub, which  
you can use to connect additional USB devices.  
DIT module  
This topic provides information about the DIT module and the diagnostic LEDs on the panel of the DIT  
module.  
18 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note: The DIT module is only available in some models.  
The following illustration shows the location of the DIT module and the diagnostic LEDs on the DIT panel in  
the front of the server. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the following  
illustration.  
Figure 5. DIT panel  
1 Microprocessor error LED  
4 Ambient temperature over limit LED  
2 Memory module error LED  
5 Power supply error LED (only available on models with  
redundant power supply modules)  
3 Fan error LED  
1
2
3
5 Error LEDs  
When one of these error LEDs is lit (orange), it indicates that the associated component has failed.  
4 Ambient temperature over limit LED  
When this LED is lit (orange), it indicates that the ambient temperature is over 38°C (100.4°F).  
Rear view of the server  
This topic provides information to help you locate the connectors and components on the rear of your server.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The following illustration shows the rear view of the server with a screw-secured, non-hot-swap power supply.  
Figure 6. Rear view of the server with a non-hot-swap power supply  
1 Power cord connector  
2 Serial port  
5 Expansion card area  
6 Ethernet connector 1 (RJ-45)  
7 Ethernet connector 2 (RJ-45) (for system management)  
8 Front door key  
3 VGA DB-15 connector  
4 Four USB connectors  
20 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For server models that have hot-swap redundant power supply module(s), there might be one or two power  
cord connectors 1 on the rear of the server. For each hot-swap redundant power supply module, there  
might be one or two status LEDs on the power supply module near the power cord connector. When the  
green LED is lit, it indicates that the hot-swap redundant power supply module is working properly. When  
the red LED is lit, it indicates that the hot-swap redundant power supply module has failed.  
Figure 7. Rear view of the server with hot-swap redundant power supply modules  
1 Power cord connector(s)  
Used to connect the power cord(s).  
2 Serial port  
Used to attach a device that uses a 9-pin serial port.  
3 VGA DB-15 connector  
Used to attach a video device, such as a VGA monitor or other devices that use a VGA DB-15 connector.  
4 USB connectors  
Used to attach a device that requires a USB connector, such as a USB keyboard, a USB mouse, a USB  
scanner, or a USB printer. If you have more than six USB devices, you can purchase a USB hub, which  
you can use to connect additional USB devices.  
5 Expansion card area  
You server has four expansion slots on the system board for you to install appropriate PCI cards. For  
detailed information, see “System board components” on page 42.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7 Ethernet connectors  
Used to attach an Ethernet cable for a LAN. Each Ethernet connector has two status LEDs to help you  
identify the Ethernet connectivity, activity, and connection speed.  
Note: The Ethernet connector 2 (callout 7 ) marked with “MGMT” is for system management. If you want to  
use remote management functions, you need to connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector 2.  
Ethernet status LED  
1 Left  
Description  
Color  
Status  
The server is connected to a LAN.  
The server is disconnected from a LAN.  
The LAN is connected and active.  
Green  
None  
Green  
On  
Off  
Blinking  
On  
2 Right  
Amber  
The connection speed is 1000 Mbps  
(megabits per second).  
The connection speed is 100 Mbps.  
The connection speed is 10 Mbps.  
Green  
None  
On  
Off  
8 Front door key  
Used to open or lock the front door.  
Note: Carefully save the front door key to avoid loss.  
Server locks  
Locking the server cover helps prevent unauthorized access to the inside of your server and locking the front  
door helps prevent unauthorized access to the installed hard disk drives.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
22 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Padlock  
Your server comes with a padlock loop so that the server cover cannot be removed when a padlock  
is installed.  
Figure 8. Padlock  
Chapter 3. Product overview 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Integrated cable lock  
An integrated cable lock, sometimes referred to as the Kensington lock, can be used to secure your server to  
a non-permanent fixture. The cable lock attaches to the integrated cable lock slot at the rear of your server  
and is operated with a key. The cable lock also locks the server cover. This is the same type of lock used  
with many notebook computers. You can order an integrated cable lock directly from Lenovo by searching  
for Kensington at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
Figure 9. Integrated cable lock  
24 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front door lock  
You can remove the key attached on the server and use it to open or lock the front door of the server.  
The front door helps protect the hard disk drive cages to prevent unauthorized access to the installed  
hard disk drives.  
Figure 10. Front door lock  
Server components  
This topic provides information to help you locate the components of your server.  
To remove the server cover and gain access to the inside of the server, see “Removing the server cover”  
on page 85.  
The chassis configuration varies by model. The following illustrations show the four main chassis  
configurations based on the supported hard disk drives.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The following illustration shows the components of the server with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard  
disk drives.  
Figure 11. Components of the server with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives  
12 Hard disk drive bay 0  
1 DIT module (available in some models)  
2 Front panel  
13 Front system fan 1  
3 Optical drive bay 2 (with an optical drive installed 14 Front system fan 2  
in some models)  
4 Optical drive bay 1 (with an optical drive installed) 15 System board battery  
5 Hard disk drive bay 7  
6 Hard disk drive bay 6  
7 Hard disk drive bay 5  
8 Hard disk drive bay 4  
9 Hard disk drive bay 3  
10 Hard disk drive bay 2  
16 Expansion card  
17 Heat sink and fan assembly  
18 System board  
19 Rear system fan  
20 Power supply  
21 Four memory slots (installed memory modules vary by  
model)  
11 Hard disk drive bay 1  
• For more information about 1 to 4 , see “Front view of the server” on page 15.  
Note: The DIT module 1 is only available in some models and the DIT panel also varies by model.  
See “DIT module” on page 18.  
26 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• There is a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive or a dummy hard disk drive tray installed in each hard  
disk drive bay ( 5 to 12 ).  
Note: The number of the installed hard disk drives varies by model. For the vacant drive bay, there is a  
dummy hard disk drive tray to cover the place.  
• For information about the supported expansion card, see “System board components” on page 42.  
• Depending on the model, your server might come with a screw-secured, non-hot-swap power supply  
or hot-swap redundant power supply module(s).  
• For more information about the memory modules, see “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following illustration shows the components of the server with up to eight 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS  
hard disk drives.  
Figure 12. Components of the server with up to eight 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard disk drives  
11 Hard disk drive bay 1  
1 DIT module (available in some models)  
2 Front panel  
12 Hard disk drive bay 0  
3 Optical drive bay 2 (with an optical drive installed 13 Front system fan 1  
in some models)  
4 Optical drive bay 1 (with an optical drive installed) 14 System board battery  
5 Hard disk drive bay 7  
6 Hard disk drive bay 6  
7 Hard disk drive bay 5  
8 Hard disk drive bay 4  
9 Hard disk drive bay 3  
10 Hard disk drive bay 2  
15 Expansion card  
16 Heat sink and fan assembly  
17 System board  
18 Rear system fan  
19 Power supply  
20 Four memory slots (installed memory modules vary by  
model)  
• For more information about 1 to 4 , see “Front view of the server” on page 15.  
Note: The DIT module 1 is only available in some models and the DIT panel also varies by model.  
See “DIT module” on page 18.  
• There is a 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard disk drive or a dummy hard disk drive tray installed in each  
hard disk drive bay ( 5 to 12 ).  
28 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The number of the installed hard disk drives varies by model. For the vacant drive bay, there is a  
dummy hard disk drive tray to cover the place.  
• For information about the supported expansion card, see “System board components” on page 42.  
• Depending on the model, your server might come with a screw-secured, non-hot-swap power supply  
or hot-swap redundant power supply module(s).  
• For more information about the memory modules, see “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
The following illustration shows the components of the server with up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk  
drives.  
Figure 13. Components of the server with up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives  
1 DIT module (available in some models)  
9 Front system fan 1  
2 Front panel  
10 System board battery  
3 Optical drive bay 2 (with an optical drive installed 11 Expansion card (varies by model)  
in some models)  
4 Optical drive bay 1 (with an optical drive installed) 12 Heat sink and fan assembly  
5 Hard disk drive bay 3  
6 Hard disk drive bay 2  
7 Hard disk drive bay 1  
8 Hard disk drive bay 0  
13 System board  
14 Rear system fan  
15 Power supply  
16 Four memory slots (installed memory modules vary by  
model)  
• For more information about 1 to 4 , see “Front view of the server” on page 15.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The DIT module 1 is only available in some models and the DIT panel also varies by model.  
See “DIT module” on page 18.  
• There is a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive or a dummy hard disk drive tray installed in each hard  
disk drive bay ( 5 to 8 ).  
Note: The number of the installed hard disk drives varies by model. For the vacant drive bay, there is a  
dummy hard disk drive tray to cover the place.  
• For information about the supported expansion card, see “System board components” on page 42.  
• Depending on the model, your server might come with a screw-secured, non-hot-swap power supply  
or hot-swap redundant power supply module(s).  
• For more information about the memory modules, see “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
30 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following illustration shows the components of the server with up to four 3.5-inch non-hot-swap hard  
disk drives.  
Figure 14. Components of the server with up to four 3.5-inch non-hot-swap hard disk drives  
1 DIT module (available in some models)  
9 Front system fan 1  
2 Front panel  
10 System board battery  
3 Optical drive bay 2 (with an optical drive installed 11 Expansion card (varies by model)  
in some models)  
4 Optical drive bay 1 (with an optical drive installed) 12 Heat sink and fan assembly  
5 Hard disk drive bay 3  
6 Hard disk drive bay 2  
7 Hard disk drive bay 1  
8 Hard disk drive bay 0  
13 System board  
14 Rear system fan  
15 Power supply  
16 Four memory slots (installed memory modules vary by  
model)  
• For more information about 1 to 4 , see “Front view of the server” on page 15.  
Note: The DIT module 1 is only available in some models and the DIT panel also varies by model.  
See “DIT module” on page 18.  
• Each of the hard disk drive bay ( 5 to 8 ) is used for installing a 3.5-inch non-hot-swap hard disk drives.  
Note: The number of the installed hard disk drives varies by model.  
• For information about the supported expansion card, see “System board components” on page 42.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Depending on the model, your server might come with a screw-secured, non-hot-swap power supply  
or hot-swap redundant power supply module(s).  
• For more information about the memory modules, see “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
Hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs  
This topic applies only to server models with hot-swap hard disk drives.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
Each hot-swap hard disk drive has two status LEDs on the front. Unlock and open the front door to gain  
access to the hard disk drives and view the status LEDs.  
Figure 15. 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs  
32 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 16. 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs  
1 Hard disk drive activity LED 2 Hard disk drive RAID status LED  
Description  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
The hard disk drive has failed or is  
not present.  
The hard disk drive is present but not  
in use.  
On, green  
Blinking, green  
On, green  
The hard disk drive is active and data  
is being transferred.  
Blinking rapidly (about four flashes  
per second), amber  
The RAID controller is identifying the  
hard disk drive.  
On, green  
On, amber  
The RAID array has failed and cannot  
recover. You need to recreate a new  
array.  
Blinking, green  
The hard disk drive is being rebuilt.  
Blinking slowly (about one flash per  
second), amber  
RAID card  
This topic provides information to help you locate the connectors on a RAID card if you have one installed in  
the PCI-E slot 3 on the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Some server models come with a required RAID card to provide advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID  
functions to the server. You can also purchase the RAID card from Lenovo and install it into models that  
support the RAID card to get advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID functions. See “Installing or removing  
the RAID card” on page 98.  
Note: For server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use SAS hard disk drives, there  
must be a RAID card installed.  
Option name: ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 0/1 Adapter (hereinafter referred to as the RAID card)  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the RAID card.  
Figure 17. ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 0/1 Adapter  
1 Port 0  
3 RAID 5 key connector  
2 Port 1  
4 External connector  
1 Port 0  
Used to connect a mini-SAS signal cable. See “Connecting cables” on page 38.  
2 Port 1  
Used to connect a mini-SAS signal cable. See “Connecting cables” on page 38.  
3 RAID 5 key connector  
Used to connect a ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key. See “Installing or removing the ThinkServer  
9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key” on page 100.  
4 External connector  
Used to connect a 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable.  
See “Connecting cables” on page 38.  
Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
Your server supports the following hot-swap hard disk drive and backplane configurations:  
• Five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap SATA or SAS hard disk drives with two backplanes  
• Up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap SATA or SAS hard disk drives with one backplane  
34 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Up to eight 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard disk drives with one backplane  
The following illustration shows the locations of the hot-swap hard disk drive backplanes. You need to open  
the server cover and remove the front system fans to access the backplanes. See “Removing the server  
cover” on page 85 and “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
Notes:  
1. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustration in this topic.  
2. The following illustration is based on five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap SATA or SAS hard disk drives  
with two backplanes 1 .  
Figure 18. Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane locations  
Backplane for 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives  
This topic provides information to help you locate the connectors on a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
backplane.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following illustrations show the connectors on a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
Figure 19. Front view of the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
1 Slot 0 for a 3.5-inch SATA or SAS hot-swap hard  
3 Slot 2 for a 3.5-inch SATA or SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
disk drive  
2 Slot 1 for a 3.5-inch SATA or SAS hot-swap hard  
4 Slot 3 for a 3.5-inch SATA or SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
disk drive  
Figure 20. Rear view of the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
1 8-pin power connector  
• For 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane on the lower hard disk drive cage, connect the P5 power  
connector of the power supply to the 8-pin power connector on the backplane.  
• For 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane on the upper hard disk drive cage, connect the P4 power  
connector of the power supply to the 8-pin power connector on the backplane.  
2 Mini-SAS signal cable connector  
Used to connect the mini-SAS connector on one end of the mini-SAS signal cable.  
36 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backplane for 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives  
This topic provides information to help you locate the connectors on the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk  
drive backplane.  
The following illustrations show the connectors on the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
Figure 21. Front view of the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
1 Slot 0 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drive  
5 Slot 4 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
6 Slot 5 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
7 Slot 6 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
8 Slot 7 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drive  
2 Slot 1 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drive  
3 Slot 2 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drive  
4 Slot 3 for a 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drive  
Figure 22. Rear view of the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
1 8-pin power connector  
Used to connect the P5 power connector of the power supply.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Mini-SAS signal cable connector 2  
Used to connect the mini-SAS connector on one end of the mini-SAS signal cable.  
3 Mini-SAS signal cable connector 1  
Used to connect the mini-SAS connector on one end of the mini-SAS signal cable.  
Connecting cables  
This topic provides instructions on how to connect the mini-SAS signal cable(s) to the hot-swap hard disk  
drive backplane(s) and the system board or the required RAID card if you have one installed.  
This topic applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drive(s) installed and the cable  
connections are different depending on the following configurations:  
• Server models with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives and two backplanes  
• Server models with up to eight 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane  
• Server models with up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane  
Server models with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives and two backplanes  
For server models with five to eight SAS or SATA II 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives and two backplanes, a  
required RAID card must be installed in the server.  
The following cables that come with the RAID card are required:  
Note: The option package for the RAID card is designed for different types of servers and might contain  
additional cables that are not required to be installed into your server.  
• Two 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cables  
• One 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable  
38 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Use the following instructions to connect the cables:  
1. Use one 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable. Connect the mini-SAS connector  
1 to the port 0 on the RAID card. Then, connect the mini-SAS connector 2 to the mini-SAS signal  
cable connector on the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane installed on the lower hard disk  
drive cage.  
2. Use the other 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable. Connect the mini-SAS  
connector 5 to the port 1 on the RAID card. Then, connect the mini-SAS connector 6 to the mini-SAS  
signal cable connector on the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane installed on the upper  
hard disk drive cage.  
3. Use the 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable. Connect the  
end 4 to the external connector on the RAID card and the end 3 to the hard disk drive LED connector  
on the system board.  
Figure 23. Connecting cables for server models with two backplanes and a RAID card  
For connector location information about the RAID card, hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, and the  
system board, refer to the related topics in “Locations” on page 13.  
For information about connecting the appropriate power connector of the power supply to the backplane,  
see “Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane” on page 34.  
Server models with up to eight 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane  
For server models with up to eight 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane, a required  
RAID card must be installed in the server.  
The following cables that come with the RAID card are required:  
Note: The option package for the RAID card is designed for different types of servers and might contain  
additional cables that are not required to be installed into your server.  
• One or two 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cables depending on the number of  
the hard disk drives installed  
• One 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable  
Chapter 3. Product overview 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use the following instructions to connect the cables:  
1. Use one 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable. Connect the mini-SAS connector 1  
to the port 0 on the RAID card. Then, connect the mini-SAS connector 2 to the mini-SAS signal cable  
connector 1 on the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
2. If you have more than four 2.5-inch hard disk drives installed, use the other 700 mm (27.56 inches)  
mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable. Connect the mini-SAS connector 5 to the port 1 on the RAID card.  
Then, connect the mini-SAS connector 6 to the mini-SAS signal cable connector 2 on the 2.5-inch  
hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
3. Use the 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable. Connect the  
end 4 to the external connector on the RAID card and the end 3 to the hard disk drive LED connector  
on the system board.  
Figure 24. Connecting cables for server models with one 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane and a RAID card  
For connector location information about the RAID card, hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, and the  
system board, refer to the related topics in “Locations” on page 13.  
For information about connecting the appropriate power connector of the power supply to the backplane,  
see “Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane” on page 34.  
Server models with up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane  
For server models with up to four 3.5-inch SATA hot-swap hard disk drives and one backplane, you can either  
connect the SATA hard disk drive(s) to the SATA connectors on the system board or a required RAID card if  
you have one installed in the server. For server models with up to four 3.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drives and one backplane, connect the SAS hard disk drive(s) to the required RAID card installed in the server.  
Note: SATA II is the only type of SATA supported by the RAID card.  
Use the following instructions to connect the cables:  
40 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are connecting the SATA hard disk drives to the system board, use the 450 mm (17.72 inches)  
mini-SAS signal cable with four SATA ports and one Serial General Purpose Input/Output (SGPIO) port.  
Connect the mini-SAS connector 1 to the mini-SAS signal cable connector on the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard  
disk drive backplane and connect the four SATA ports 3 – 6 to the SATA connector 0 to SATA connector 3  
on the system board. Then, connect the SGPIO port 2 to the SATA SGPIO connector on the system board.  
Notes:  
1. The number on the label for each of the four SATA signal cables indicates the sequence when you are  
connecting the cables to the corresponding SATA connectors (0-3) on the system board.  
SATA signal cable label  
System board SATA connector  
SATA connector 0  
P0  
P1  
P2  
P3  
SATA connector 1  
SATA connector 2  
SATA connector 3  
2. If you connect the SATA hard disk drives to the system board, you can configure RAID using the  
configuration utility for the onboard SATA software RAID. See “Configuring the onboard SATA software  
RAID” on page 74.  
Figure 25. Mini-SAS signal cable with four SATA ports and one SGPIO port  
The RAID card provides advanced SATA/SAS RAID configurations. If you are using SAS hot-swap hard disk  
drives, you must have the RAID card for connecting the SAS hard disk drives. To connect the hard disk  
drives to the installed RAID card, the following cables that come with the RAID card are required:  
Note: The option package for the RAID card is designed for different types of servers and might contain  
additional cables that are not required to be installed into your server.  
• One 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable  
• One 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable  
Chapter 3. Product overview 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To connect the cables, do the following:  
1. Use the 700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable. Connect the mini-SAS connector  
1 to the port 0 on the RAID card. Then, connect the mini-SAS connector 2 to the mini-SAS signal  
cable connector on the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
2. Use the 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable. Connect the  
end 4 to the external connector on the RAID card and the end 3 to the hard disk drive LED connector  
on the system board.  
Figure 26. Connecting cables for server models with one 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane and a RAID card  
For connector location information about the RAID card, hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, and the  
system board, refer to the related topics in “Locations” on page 13.  
For information about connecting the appropriate power connector of the power supply to the backplane,  
see “Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane” on page 34.  
System board components  
Your server system board is a six-layer micro-ATX board based on the Intel Bromolow platform. The  
following illustration shows the component locations on the system board.  
42 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 27. System board components  
1 Power Management Bus (PMBus) connector  
2 TPM connector  
20 Internal USB 2.0 Type A connector  
21 Internal dual-port USB 2.0 connector 2  
22 Internal dual-port USB 2.0 connector 1  
23 System board battery  
3 Memory slot 4 (DIMMB2)  
4 Memory slot 3 (DIMMB1)  
5 Memory slot 2 (DIMMA2)  
6 Memory slot 1 (DIMMA1)  
7 iButton socket  
24 Front panel connector  
25 System board jumper blocks  
26 SATA SGPIO connector  
8 Main power connector  
9 5-pin system fan 2 connector  
10 Microprocessor  
27 Hard disk drive LED connector  
28 DIT module connector  
29 Internal serial connector  
11 Intel C202 chip  
30 PCI card slot (PCI slot 1)  
12 4-pin system fan 1 connector  
13 SATA connector 1  
31 PCI Express x4 card slot (PCI-E slot 2)  
32 BMC chip  
14 SATA connector 0  
33 PCI Express x8 card slot (PCI-E slot 3)  
34 PCI Express x8 card slot (PCI-E slot 4)  
35 Microprocessor fan connector  
36 System fan 3 connector  
15 SATA connector 3  
16 SATA connector 2  
17 SATA connector 5  
37 Microprocessor power connector  
18 SATA connector 4  
19 iKVM key connector  
Chapter 3. Product overview 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 PMBus connector  
The BMC can read the power supply status registered through PMBus. You do not need to connect  
any device to the PMBus connector. This connector is kept for power management in models with  
redundant power supply modules. The function of the PMBus connector is not available for models with a  
screw-secured non-hot-swap power supply.  
2 TPM connector  
Used to connect a TPM module, which is a security chip, to protect your server and strengthen server  
security. See “Installing or removing the TPM module” on page 109.  
3 – 6 Memory slots  
Your server system board provides four memory slots to support up to four memory modules. For more  
information, see “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
7 iButton socket  
Your server supports onboard SATA software RAID levels 0, 1, and 10. However, you can activate onboard  
SATA software RAID 5 by installing a ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 activation key in the iButton socket.  
For more information, see “Installing or removing the ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key” on page 102.  
8 Main power connector  
Used to connect the 24-pin P1 power connector of the power supply to provide main power to your server.  
9 5-pin system fan 2 connector  
Used to connect the cable of the upper front system fan (front system fan 2) if your server model has  
two front system fans.  
10 Microprocessor  
A microprocessor incorporates most or all of the functions of a computer's central processing unit (CPU) on  
a single integrated circuit. The microprocessor for your server is secured in the microprocessor socket on  
the system board and a heat sink and fan assembly is installed above the microprocessor to provide cooling.  
For more information about your microprocessor type, see “Features” on page 7.  
11 Intel C202 chip  
The Intel C202 chip on the system board serves as a platform controller hub (PCH), which provides the data  
buffering and interface arbitration required to ensure that system interfaces operate efficiently and provides  
the bandwidth necessary to enable the system to obtain peak performance. The chip supports and provides  
many features, including the onboard SATA software RAID.  
12 4-pin system fan 1 connector  
Used to connect the cable of the lower front system fan (front system fan 1).  
13 – 18 SATA connectors  
Used to connect SATA signal cables for the SATA hard disk drives or SATA optical drives.  
44 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19 iKVM key connector  
Used to connect an iKVM key option, which is a kind of remote management module, to enable the iKVM  
function on your server. See “Installing or removing the ThinkServer iKVM Remote Management Module” on  
page 105.  
20 Internal USB 2.0 Type A connector  
Used to connect a device that uses a USB 2.0 Type A connector.  
21 Internal dual-port USB 2.0 connector 2  
Used to connect the USB cable of the RDX USB drive bundle (server option).  
22 Internal dual-port USB 2.0 connector 1  
Used to connect the front panel USB cable.  
23 System board battery  
Your server has a special type of memory that maintains the date, time, and configuration information for  
built-in features. The system board battery keeps the information active when you turn off the server.  
24 Front panel connector  
Used to connect the front panel cable.  
25 System board jumper blocks  
Used to configure the system board and your server. See “System board jumpers” on page 46.  
26 SATA SGPIO connector  
Used to connect the SGPIO port of the mini-SAS signal cable with four SATA ports and one SGPIO port to  
enable the RAID status LEDs for hot-swap hard disk drives.  
27 Hard disk drive LED connector  
Used to connect a 2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable.  
See “Connecting cables” on page 38.  
28 DIT module connector  
Used to connect the cable of the DIT module if your server has one installed.  
29 Internal serial connector  
Used to provide an optional serial connector solution with a required cable.  
30 PCI card slot (PCI slot 1)  
Used to install a standard 32-bit 33 MHz PCI card with 167 mm (6.57 inches) in length.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31 PCI Express x4 card slot (PCI-E slot 2)  
This is a PCI Express x4 lane in physical PCI 2.0 x8 slot that supports a PCI Express x4 card with 167 mm  
(6.57 inches) in length, such as an Ethernet card.  
32 BMC chip  
With the integrated BMC chip, no matter what condition the server operating system is in and no matter if  
the server is on or off, as long as the server is connected to network and an ac power source, the interaction  
with the BMC controlled servers can be achieved through system network. The user can obtain the server  
hardware health information and SEL, and is able to conduct the operations including turning on or of the  
server, restarting the server, locking the power switch on the front panel and so on. This part of the server  
management is independent of the operating system and is called out-of-band management.  
33 PCI Express x8 card slot (PCI-E slot 3)  
This is a PCI Express x8 lane in physical PCI 2.0 x8 slot that supports a PCI Express x8 card with 167 mm  
(6.57 inches) in length, such as an Ethernet card or a RAID card.  
34 PCI Express x8 card slot (PCI-E slot 4)  
This is a PCI Express x8 lane in physical PCI 2.0 x16 slot that supports a PCI Express x8 card with 312 mm  
(12.28 inches) in length, such as a graphics card.  
35 Microprocessor fan connector  
Used to connect the heat sink and fan assembly cable.  
36 System fan 3 connector  
Used to connect the rear system fan cable.  
37 Microprocessor power connector  
Used to connect the 8-pin P2 power connector of the power supply to provide power to your microprocessor.  
System board jumpers  
This topic provides information about the jumpers on the system board.  
A jumper is a short length of conductor used to set up or adjust printed circuit boards, such as the system  
board of a computer. A jumper is usually encased in a non-conductive block of plastic for convenient use  
and avoiding any possible damage to a live circuit. Jumper pins arranged in groups on the system board are  
called jumper blocks. When two or more jumper pins are capped with a jumper, an electrical connection is  
made between them and the equipment is thus instructed to activate certain settings accordingly.  
46 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following illustration shows a jumper in the default setting position (pin 1 and pin 2). This is the correct  
position for normal operation.  
Figure 28. Default jumper setting  
Chapter 3. Product overview 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following illustration shows the status of the jumpers on the system board of your server. You can  
configure, recover, enable, or disable some specific features of the system board by setting the jumpers.  
Figure 29. System board jumpers  
1 Clear CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide  
4 Clear password jumper  
Semiconductor) /Recovery jumper  
2 BMC setting jumper  
5 Manufacturing jumper (reserved for the manufacturer)  
3 BIOS recovery jumper  
Attention: To set the jumpers, you need to open the server cover. Do not open your server or attempt any  
repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information” on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
1 Clear CMOS /Recovery jumper  
Used to clear CMOS and recover your server to the factory default settings.  
Note: After clearing CMOS, all your BIOS passwords are erased and the BIOS recovers to the factory  
default settings.  
To clear CMOS, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
48 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the Clear CMOS /Recovery jumper on the system board and then move the jumper from the  
default normal position (pin 1 and pin 2) to the short-circuited position (pin 2 and pin 3).  
5. Wait more than 10 seconds and then move the Clear CMOS /Recovery jumper back to the normal  
position (pin 1 and pin 2).  
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the power cord(s). See “Completing the parts replacement” on  
page 168.  
7. Wait about 30 seconds. Then, turn on the server. The BIOS passwords are erased and the BIOS  
recovers to the factory default settings.  
2 BMC setting jumper  
When the BMC setting jumper is in the default normal position (pin 1 and pin 2), the server needs about 30  
seconds for the BMC to initialize whenever you connect the server to an ac power source. If you press the  
power switch on the front panel during this period, the server will not start immediately; it will start after  
the BMC initialization finishes.  
If you move the BMC setting jumper to pin 2 and pin 3, the server will be directly turned on when you press the  
power switch without waiting for the BMC ready. The BMC function might not be available in this situation.  
3 BIOS recovery jumper  
Set the jumper and boot the server from a BIOS recovery image in order to recover your BIOS settings.  
To recover the BIOS, see “Recovering from a BIOS update failure” on page 68.  
4 Clear password jumper  
Used to erase forgotten passwords, such as an administrator password and a user password.  
To clear passwords, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the Clear password jumper on the system board and then move the jumper from the default  
normal position (pin 1 and pin 2) to the short-circuited position (pin 2 and pin 3).  
5. Wait more than 10 seconds and then move the Clear password jumper back to the normal position  
(pin 1 and pin 2).  
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the power cord(s). See “Completing the parts replacement” on  
page 168.  
7. Wait about 30 seconds. Then, turn on the server. The BIOS passwords are erased, including the  
administrator password and user password.  
8. To set new passwords, see “Using passwords” on page 65.  
5 Manufacturing jumper  
Reserved for the manufacturer.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System board LEDs  
This topic helps you locate the LEDs on the system board.  
The following illustration shows the BMC status LED, system board hardware fault LED, and the POST code  
diagnostic LEDs on the system board.  
Figure 30. System board LEDs  
1 System board hardware fault LED  
2 BMC status LED  
6 POST code diagnostic LED #1  
7 POST code diagnostic LED #6  
8 POST code diagnostic LED #2  
3 POST code diagnostic LED #4  
4 POST code diagnostic LED #0 - Least Significant 9 POST code diagnostic LED #7 - Most Significant Bit (MSB)  
Bit (LSB)  
5 POST code diagnostic LED #5  
10 POST code diagnostic LED #3  
1 System board hardware fault LED  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the system board hardware has failed.  
50 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 BMC status LED  
This LED indicates the BMC status of your server.  
Description  
The BMC is not ready.  
BMC status LED  
Color  
Green  
None  
Green  
On  
Off  
The BMC has no power or fails.  
The BMC is working.  
Blinking  
3 - 10 POST code diagnostic LEDs  
During the system boot process, the BIOS executes several platform configuration processes, each of  
which is assigned a specific hex POST code number. When each configuration routine is started, the BIOS  
displays the POST code number through the POST code diagnostic LEDs on the system board. To assist in  
troubleshooting a system hang during the POST process, the diagnostic LEDs can be used to identify the  
last POST process executed.  
The POST code diagnostic LED #0 (callout 4 ) is the LSB and the POST code diagnostic LED #7 (callout 9 )  
is the MSB. If a POST code diagnostic LED is lit, it indicates 1 in the binary numeral system; otherwise, it  
indicates 0. For example, if POST code diagnostic LEDs 5 , 6 , 9 , and 10 are lit, you can read the number  
as the following:  
9
7
5
3
10  
8
6
4
POST code diagnostic LED  
Binary symbol  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
The “10101010” indicates a corresponding POST code.  
Note: The POST code diagnostic LEDs and POST error code information are intended for trained service  
personnel of Lenovo.  
The following table lists information about the POST error codes.  
Description  
Microcode not found.  
POST code diagnostic LEDs  
00001110  
POST error code  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x50  
00001111  
Microcode not loaded.  
01010000  
Memory initialization error. The  
memory type is invalid or the memory  
speed is incompatible.  
01010001  
01010010  
0x51  
0x52  
Memory initialization error. The Serial  
Presence Detect (SPD) data reading  
has failed.  
Memory initialization error. The  
memory size is invalid or the memory  
modules do not match.  
01010011  
01010100  
0x53  
0x54  
Memory initialization error. No usable  
memory detected.  
Unspecified memory initialization  
error.  
01010101  
01010110  
0x55  
0x56  
Memory not installed.  
Invalid microprocessor type or speed.  
Chapter 3. Product overview 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Description  
POST code diagnostic LEDs  
01010111  
POST error code  
0x57  
0x58  
Microprocessor mismatch.  
01011000  
Microprocessor self-test failed or  
microprocessor cache error occurred.  
01011001  
0x59  
Microprocessor microcode not found  
or microcode updating failed.  
01011010  
01011011  
11101000  
11101001  
11101010  
11101011  
11111000  
11111001  
11111010  
11010000  
11010001  
11010010  
11010011  
0x5A  
0x5B  
0xE8  
0xE9  
0xEA  
0xEB  
0xF8  
0xF9  
0xFA  
0xD0  
0xD1  
0xD2  
0xD3  
Internal microprocessor error.  
Reset PPI not available.  
S3 resume operation failed.  
S3 resume PPI not found.  
S3 resume boot script error.  
S3 operating system wake error.  
Recovery PPI not available.  
Recovery capsule not found.  
Invalid recovery capsule.  
Microprocessor initialization error.  
North bridge initialization error.  
South bridge initialization error.  
Some architectural protocols not  
available.  
11010100  
0xD4  
PCI resource allocation error. Out of  
resources.  
11010101  
11010110  
11010111  
11011000  
11011001  
0xD5  
0xD6  
0xD7  
0xD8  
0xD9  
No space for the legacy option ROM.  
Console output devices not found.  
Console input devices not found.  
Invalid password.  
Error loading Boot Option (LoadImage  
returned error).  
11011010  
0xDA  
Boot Option failed (StartImage  
returned error).  
11011011  
11011100  
0xDB  
0xDC  
Flash updating failed.  
Reset protocol not available.  
52 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Turning on and turning off the server  
This chapter provides information about turning on and turning off the server.  
Turning on the server  
The server can be turned on in one of the following ways:  
• After you finish unpacking and setting up the server, connect it to an ac power source. Press the power  
switch on the front panel to turn on the server. See “Front panel” on page 17. The server needs about  
30 seconds for the BMC to initialize whenever you connect the server to an ac power source. If you  
press the power switch on the front panel during this period, the server will not start immediately; it will  
start after the BMC initialization finishes.  
• When the Wake on LAN feature is enabled on the server that is connected to an ac power source and a  
LAN, a network administrator can remotely turn on or wake up the server from a management console  
using remote network management software.  
• You can also use the related BMC feature to remotely turn on the server through the management LAN.  
Turning off the server  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power  
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected  
from the power source.  
The server can be turned off in one of the following ways:  
• Turn off the server from the operating system if your operating system supports this feature. After an  
orderly shutdown of the operating system, the server will turn off automatically. For instructions on how  
to shut down your specific operating system, refer to the related documentation or help system for  
the operating system.  
• Press the power switch on the front panel to start an orderly shutdown of the operating system and turn  
off the server, if your operating system supports this feature.  
• If your server stops responding and you cannot turn it off, press and hold the power switch on the  
front panel for four seconds or more. If you still cannot turn off the server, disconnect all power cords  
from the server.  
• If the server is connected to a LAN, a network administrator can remotely turn off the server from a  
management console using remote network management software.  
• You can also use the related BMC feature to remotely turn off the server through the management LAN.  
• The server might be turned off as an automatic response to a critical system failure.  
Notes:  
1. When you turn off the server and leave it connected to an ac power source, the server can also respond  
to a remote request to turn on the server. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect  
the server from the ac power source.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. For information about your specific operating system, refer to the related documentation or help system  
for the operating system.  
54 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server  
This chapter provides the following information to help you configure the server:  
•
•
•
•
•
“Using the Setup Utility program” on page 55  
“Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on page 69  
“Configuring RAID” on page 71  
“Configuring the Ethernet controllers” on page 80  
“Updating the firmware” on page 80  
Using the Setup Utility program  
This topic provides information about using the Setup Utility program.  
The Setup Utility program is part of the server firmware. You can use the Setup Utility program to view and  
change the configuration settings of your server, regardless of which operating system you are using.  
However, the operating system settings might override any similar settings in the Setup Utility program.  
Starting the Setup Utility program  
This topic provides instructions on how to start the Setup Utility program.  
To start the Setup Utility program, do the following:  
1. Connect the server to an ac power source and press the power switch on the front panel to turn on the  
server. See “Turning on the server” on page 53.  
2. Press the F1 key as soon as you see the logo screen. Then, wait for several seconds, and the Setup  
Utility program opens. If you have set a password, you need to type the correct password to enter the  
Setup Utility program. For password information, see “Using passwords” on page 65.  
Viewing information in the Setup Utility program  
The Setup Utility program menu lists various items about the system configuration. Select a desired item  
to view information or change settings.  
When working with the Setup Utility program, you must use the keyboard. The keys used to perform various  
tasks are displayed on the right bottom pane of each screen. You can also press the F1 key for general help  
about the keys. For most items, the corresponding help message is displayed on the right top pane of the  
screen when the item is selected. If the item has submenus, you can display the submenus by pressing Enter.  
You can view the following information about your specific server model from the Setup Utility program:  
• The Main menu lists information about the BIOS version, microprocessor type and core frequency,  
memory size, and system date and time.  
• On the Advanced menu:  
– Select Processor Configuration to view the information about the installed microprocessor and  
its supported technologies.  
– Select Memory Configuration to view the information about the installed memory modules.  
– Select SATA Configuration. Then, select the desired SATA port from SATA Port0 to SATA Port5 to view  
the information about the installed SATA devices, such as a SATA hard disk drive or an optical drive.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
• On the Server Management menu, select System Information to view the information about your  
system, including the BMC information.  
Setup Utility program interface  
This topic provides information about the menus and items in the Setup Utility program.  
Depending on the version of your system BIOS, some menu or item information might differ slightly from the  
information in this topic. The information in this topic is based on the 0.9b version of the BIOS.  
Notes:  
1. The default settings are already optimized for you. Use the default value for any item you are not familiar  
with. Do not change the value of unfamiliar items or items that are not mentioned in this topic to avoid  
unexpected problems. If you consider changing the server configuration, proceed with extreme caution.  
Setting the configuration incorrectly might cause unexpected results. If you cannot turn on the server  
because of incorrect BIOS settings, use the Clear CMOS /Recovery jumper to recover the BIOS to the  
factory default settings or use the BIOS recovery jumper to boot the server from a BIOS recovery image  
and recover the BIOS to the version in the image. See “System board jumpers” on page 46.  
2. Lenovo provides the BIOS update utility on the Lenovo Support Web site. You can download the BIOS  
image and follow the instructions on the Web site to update the BIOS. See “Updating or recovering the  
BIOS” on page 67. After updating the BIOS, all the BIOS settings become the default settings of the  
updated BIOS version. You need to check and reconfigure the BIOS settings for your specific needs.  
3. If you have changed any hardware in the server, you might need to reflash the BIOS, the BMC firmware,  
and the FRU/SDR.  
The following menus are listed on the BIOS Setup Utility screen:  
• Main: See “Main menu” on page 56.  
• Advanced: See “Advanced menu” on page 57.  
• Security: See “Security menu” on page 60.  
• Server Management: See “Server Management menu” on page 61.  
• Boot Options: See “Boot Options menu” on page 62.  
• Boot Manager: See “Boot Manager menu” on page 64.  
• Exit: “Exit menu” on page 64.  
Main menu  
After entering the Setup Utility program, you can see the Main menu, which lists some basic information  
about the system BIOS version and build date, the microprocessor, memory, and the system date and time.  
56 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The following illustration shows an example of the Main menu in the Setup Utility program.  
Figure 31. An example of the Main menu in the Setup Utility program  
To set the system date and time on the Main menu, see “Setting the system date and time” on page 64.  
Advanced menu  
This topic provides information about the various configuration menus and items on the Advanced menu  
in the Setup Utility program.  
You can view or change various server component settings on the Advanced menu. The following table  
shows the contents of the Advanced menu. On each submenu, press the Enter key to show selectable  
options and select a desired option by using up and down arrow keys or type desired values from the  
keyboard directly. Some items are displayed on the menu only if the server supports the corresponding  
features.  
Notes:  
• Enabled means that the function is configured.  
• Disabled means that the function is not configured.  
• Default values are in boldface in the Selections column.  
Advanced menu items  
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Selections  
• Disabled  
Comments  
Intel Hyper-Threading  
Technology  
Enable or disable the  
Intel Hyper-Threading  
Technology.  
Processor Configuration  
(set the microprocessor  
configuration parameters)  
• Enabled  
• All  
Active Processor Cores  
Set the active  
microprocessor cores.  
• 1  
• 2  
• 3  
Intel Virtualization  
Technology  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
Enable or disable the Intel  
Virtualization Technology.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Selections  
• Disabled  
Comments  
Enable or disable the Intel  
EIST Technology.  
Intel EIST Technology  
• Enabled  
• HW_ALL  
• SW_ALL  
• SW_ANY  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• ACPI C2  
• ACPI C3  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
P-State Coordination  
Change the P-State  
Coordination type.  
Intel Turbo Boost  
Technology  
Enable or disable the Intel  
Turbo Boost Technology.  
C1E Support  
Enable or disable the C1E  
Support.  
CPU C3 Report  
Enable or disable the CPU  
C3 report.  
CPU C6 Report  
Enable or disable the CPU  
C6 report.  
Package C State Limit  
• C0  
Set the Package C state  
limit.  
• C1  
• C6  
• C7  
• No Limit  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
Hardware Prefetcher  
Enable or disable the  
hardware prefetcher  
function.  
• Disabled  
Enable or disable the  
adjacent cache line  
prefetcher function.  
Adjacent Cache Line  
Prefetch  
• Enabled  
Memory Reset  
• No  
Memory Configuration  
(set memory configuration  
parameters and view  
information about the  
installed memory modules)  
Set the memory module  
reset options. If a memory  
module encounters any  
errors, set this option to  
Yes to try to re-initialize the  
memory module.  
• Yes  
Intel VT-d Technology  
Intel TXT Technology  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
Enable or disable the Intel  
VT-d technology.  
Chipset Configuration  
(set chipset configuration  
parameters)  
Enable or disable the  
Intel Trusted Execution  
Technology (TXT).  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
Enable or disable the serial  
port 1 (COM 1).  
Serial Port 1  
Enable or disable the serial  
port 2 (COM 2).  
Serial Port 2  
Enable or disable powering  
on by RTC alarm.  
Power on by RTC Alarm  
Restore on AC Power Loss • Stay off  
Select the system resume  
status after ac power loss.  
• Last State  
58 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Selections  
• Power on  
Comments  
If the power is interrupted  
when the server is on, after  
the power resumes:  
• If you have selected Stay  
off, the server will stay in  
the off state.  
• If you have selected Last  
State, the server will  
resume to the last state.  
• If you have selected  
Power on, the server will  
restart automatically.  
• IDE Mode  
• AHCI Mode  
• RAID Mode  
SATA Configuration  
(set SATA configuration  
parameters)  
SATA Mode  
Select SATA controller  
operation mode. If you  
want to configure RAID,  
choose RAID Mode for the  
SATA controller.  
SATA Port0  
SATA Port1  
SATA Port2  
SATA Port3  
SATA Port4  
SATA Port5  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 0 on  
the system board.  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 1 on  
the system board.  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 2 on  
the system board.  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 3 on  
the system board.  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 4 on  
the system board.  
View the information about  
the SATA device connected  
to the SATA connector 5 on  
the system board.  
• Disabled  
Enable or disable  
the onboard graphics  
controller.  
PCI Configuration (set PCI Onboard Graphics  
configuration parameters)  
Controller  
• Enabled  
Primary Graphics  
• Onboard  
Choose a mode for primary  
graphics. The Add-On  
option requires a graphics  
card installed.  
• Add-On  
• Disabled  
Enable or disable the  
onboard LAN1 I/O ROM.  
Onboard LAN1 I/O ROM  
• Enabled  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Selections  
• Disabled  
Comments  
Enable or disable the  
Onboard LAN2 I/O ROM  
onboard LAN2 I/O ROM.  
• Enabled  
PCI ROM Priority  
• Legacy ROM  
Choose a mode for the  
PCI ROM priority. In case  
of multiple Option ROMs  
(Legacy ROM and EFI  
Compatible ROM), the  
selection specifies which  
PCI Option ROM to launch.  
• EFI Compatible ROM  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
• Auto  
USB Configuration  
(set USB configuration  
parameters)  
USB Controller  
Enable or disable the USB  
controller.  
Enable or disable the  
support on legacy USB  
devices.  
Legacy USB Support  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
Enable or disable the  
port 60h/64h emulation.  
This function is for the  
operating system that does  
not support legacy USB  
devices.  
Port 60/64 Emulation  
TANDBERGRDX 3040  
• Auto  
Mass storage device  
emulation type. Auto  
means to enumerate  
• Floppy  
• Forced FDD  
• Hard Disk  
• CD-ROM  
devices according to their  
media format. Optical  
devices are emulated as  
“CD-ROM”; drives with  
no media are emulated  
according to the drive type.  
• Disabled  
The setting specifies how  
the host computer and the  
remote computer (which the  
user is using) will exchange  
data. Both computers  
should have the same or  
compatible settings.  
Console Redirection  
Configuration (set console  
redirection configuration  
parameters)  
Console Redirection  
• Serial Port 1  
• Serial Port 2  
Security menu  
This topic provides information about the security related settings on the Security menu in the Setup  
Utility program.  
You can set passwords, the TPM feature, and other security features on the Security menu. The following  
table shows the contents of the Security menu. For each menu item, press the Enter key to show selectable  
options and select a desired option by using up and down arrow keys or type desired values from the  
keyboard directly. Some items are displayed on the menu only if the server supports the corresponding  
features.  
Notes:  
• Enabled means that the function is configured.  
• Disabled means that the function is not configured.  
• Default values are in boldface in the Selections column.  
60 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Security menu items  
Menu item  
Selections  
Comments  
Set Administrator Password  
Set an administrator password  
to protect against unauthorized  
access to your server. See “Using  
passwords” on page 65.  
Set User Password  
Set a user password to protect  
against unauthorized access to your  
server. See “Using passwords” on  
page 65. This item is only available  
after you have set an administrator  
password.  
• Disabled  
If this item is set to Enabled, the  
power switch on the front panel will  
be locked and the server can only be  
turned on remotely.  
Power/Reset Button Lockout  
BIOS Write Protect  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
If you want to update or flash the  
BIOS, make sure that this item is  
set to Disabled. If this item is set to  
Enabled, the BIOS will be protected  
from updating or flashing.  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
Enable or disable the TPM support.  
To use the TPM feature, you need to  
have a TPM module installed in the  
TPM connector on the system board.  
TPM Support  
TPM State  
• Enabled  
• Disabled  
This item is displayed when the TPM  
Support is set to Enabled. Set the  
TPM State to enable or disable the  
TPM function. The server will restart  
in order to change the state of TPM.  
• Enabled  
Server Management menu  
This topic provides information about the features available on the Server Management menu in the  
Setup Utility program.  
You can view system information and view or change event log settings on the Server Management menu.  
The following table shows the contents of the Server Management menu. On each submenu, press the  
Enter key to view the information or show selectable options and select a desired option by using up and  
down arrow keys. Some items are displayed on the menu only if the server supports the corresponding  
features.  
Note: Default values are in boldface in the Selections column.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Server Management menu items  
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Selections  
Comments  
System Information  
View the information about  
your system, including the  
BMC version information.  
• Enabled  
If this item is set to Enabled,  
the SEL will be cleared.  
BMC LAN Configuration  
Clear all Event Logs  
Configuration Source  
• Disabled  
• Static  
Select to configure LAN  
channel1 parameters  
statically or dynamically  
(DHCP). The Do Nothing  
option means that BMC  
network parameters will  
not be modified during the  
BIOS phase.  
• Dynamic  
• Do Nothing  
Boot Options menu  
This topic provides information about the menus and items on the Boot Options menu in the Setup Utility  
program.  
The Boot Options menu provides an interface to help you view or change the server startup options,  
including the startup sequence and boot priority for various devices. Changes in the startup options take  
effect when you start the server.  
The startup sequence specifies the order in which the server checks devices to find a boot record. The  
server starts from the first boot record that it finds. For example, you can define a startup sequence that  
checks for a disc in the optical drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and then checks a network device.  
For information about setting the startup sequence or selecting a startup device, see “Selecting a startup  
device” on page 66.  
The following list, showing the order in which devices will be started up, is always displayed. Even devices  
that are not attached to or installed in your server are listed. For each device that is attached to or installed in  
the server, information about it is presented on the screen after the colon.  
1. UEFI Device:  
2. Hard Disk Drive:  
3. Optical Disk Drive:  
4. Removable Device:  
5. Network Device:  
The following table shows the contents of the Boot Options menu. On each submenu, press the Enter key  
to show selectable options and select a desired option by using up and down arrow keys. Some items are  
displayed on the menu only if the server supports the corresponding features.  
Notes:  
• Enabled means that the function is configured.  
• Disabled means that the function is not configured.  
• Default values are in boldface in the Selections column.  
Boot Options menu items  
62 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Boot Option #1  
Selections  
• UEFI Device  
Comments  
Set the first startup device.  
• Hard Disk Drive  
• Optical Disk Drive  
• Removable Device  
• Network Device  
• UEFI Device  
Boot Option #2  
Boot Option #3  
Boot Option #4  
Boot Option #5  
Set the second startup device.  
Set the third startup device.  
Set the fourth startup device.  
Set the fifth startup device.  
• Hard Disk Drive  
• Optical Disk Drive  
• Removable Device  
• Network Device  
• UEFI Device  
• Hard Disk Drive  
• Optical Disk Drive  
• Removable Device  
• Network Device  
• UEFI Device  
• Hard Disk Drive  
• Optical Disk Drive  
• Removable Device  
• Network Device  
• UEFI Device  
• Hard Disk Drive  
• Optical Disk Drive  
• Removable Device  
• Network Device  
UEFI Boot Device Priority  
Hard Disk Drive Priority  
Optical Disk Drive Priority  
Removable Device Priority  
Network Device Priority  
Quiet Boot  
Varies depending on the available  
UEFI devices.  
Specify the startup priority for all the  
available UEFI devices.  
Varies depending on the available  
hard disk drives.  
Specify the startup priority for all the  
available hard disk drives.  
Varies depending on the available  
optical drives.  
Specify the startup priority for all the  
available optical drives.  
Varies depending on the available  
removable devices.  
Specify the startup priority for all the  
available removable devices.  
Varies depending on the available  
network devices.  
Specify the startup priority for all the  
available network devices.  
• Disabled  
Enable or disable the quiet boot  
feature to determine whether the logo  
screen will be displayed or not when  
starting the server.  
• Enabled  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Bootup Num-Lock  
Selections  
Comments  
• On  
Turn the Num-Lock key on or off.  
• Off  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
POST Error Pause  
Enable or disable the POST error  
pause feature. When this feature  
is set to Enabled, the system will  
stop on the POST screen if any error  
occurs during the POST.  
Boot Manager menu  
This topic provides information about the Boot Manager menu in the Setup Utility program.  
The Boot Manager menu lists all the bootable devices installed on your server system board and the items  
listed vary depending on your server configuration and installed option devices. If you select a desired  
device listed on this menu, the server will start from the device you select.  
You can press F12 when turning on the server and select a temporary startup device directly from the boot  
device selection window. See “Selecting a startup device” on page 66.  
Exit menu  
This topic provides information about the Exit menu in the Setup Utility program.  
After you finish viewing or changing settings in the Setup Utility program, you can choose one desired action  
from the Exit menu to save changes, discard changes, load default values, and exit the program. The  
following table lists each item on the Exit menu with descriptions. Press Enter to select the item and then  
select Yes when prompted to confirm the action. For information about exiting the Setup Utility program,  
see “Exiting the Setup Utility program” on page 67.  
Exit menu items  
Item  
Comments  
Save Changes and Exit  
Save your settings and exit the Setup Utility program.  
Discard your settings and exit the Setup Utility program.  
Save your settings.  
Discard Changes and Exit  
Save Changes  
Discard your settings and load previous values.  
Return to the optimized default settings.  
Save the changes so far as user default values.  
Restore the user default values for all the items.  
Discard Changes  
Load Default Values  
Save as User Default Values  
Load User Default Values  
Setting the system date and time  
This topic provides instructions on how to set the system date and time in the Setup Utility program.  
To set the system date and time in the Setup Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the Setup Utility program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
2. On the Main menu, select System Date or System Time.  
3. Use the Tab key to switch between data elements and type the numbers from the keyboard to set the  
system date and time.  
4. Press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program.  
64 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using passwords  
By using the Setup Utility program, you can set a password to prevent unauthorized access to your server.  
You do not have to set a password to use your server. However, using a password improves computing  
security. If you decide to set a password, read the following topics.  
Setup Utility program password type  
The following types of passwords are available in the Setup Utility program:  
• Administrator password  
Setting an administrator password deters unauthorized users from changing configuration settings. If you  
are responsible for maintaining the configuration settings of several computers, you might want to set  
an administrator password. When an administrator password is set, you are prompted to type a valid  
password each time you try to access the Setup Utility program. The Setup Utility program cannot  
be accessed until a valid password is typed in.  
• User password (only available when you have set an administrator password)  
When a user password is set, the server cannot be used until a valid password is typed in.  
Note: If both the administrator password and user password are set, you can type either password.  
However, you must use your administrator password to change any configuration settings.  
Password considerations  
For security reasons, it is recommended to use a strong password that cannot be easily compromised.  
Notes:  
1. The Setup Utility program passwords are not case sensitive.  
2. The server supports Setup Utility program passwords that consist of up to 20 characters.  
To set a strong password, use the following guidelines:  
• Have at least eight characters in length  
• Contain at least one alphabetic character and one numeric character  
• Not be your name or your user name  
• Not be a common word or a common name  
• Be significantly different from your previous passwords  
Besides the alphabetic characters (a-z) and numeric characters (0-9), the server also supports characters  
typed using special keys on the keyboard for a password. Refer to the help message on the screen when  
setting a password to determine the valid special characters.  
Setting, changing, or deleting a password  
This topic provides instructions on how to set, change, or delete a password in the Setup Utility program.  
To set, change, or delete a password in the Setup Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the Setup Utility program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
2. On the Security menu, select Set Administrator Password to set an administrator password or select  
Set User Password to set a user password.  
Note: The Set User Password option is only available when you have already set an administrator  
password.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. See “Password considerations” on page 65. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to set or  
change a password.  
4. If you want to delete a password, type your current password. Press Enter when you are prompted  
to type a new password. Then, press Enter to confirm the new password. The previous password  
will be cleared.  
Note: If you delete an administrator password, the user password will also be deleted. For security  
reasons, it is recommended that you always set a password for your server.  
5. Press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program.  
If you have forgotten the password, you can use the Clear password jumper on the system board to erase  
the password. See “System board jumpers” on page 46. Then, set a new password for the server.  
Configuring the TPM function  
The TPM function provides a hardware security solution to encrypt data and protect the server. The TPM  
function is only available when there is a TPM module installed in your server. See “Installing the TPM  
module” on page 109. You can purchase a TPM module from Lenovo.  
After installing a TPM module, you need to check if the TPM function is enabled in the Setup Utility program.  
To enable the TPM function in the Setup Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the Setup Utility program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
2. On the Security menu, select TPM Support. Make sure that the TPM Support is set to Enabled.  
3. When the TPM Support is set to Enabled, the TPM State item is displayed. Set the TPM State to  
Enabled.  
4. Press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program. The server will restart in order to enable  
the TPM function.  
Selecting a startup device  
If your server does not start up from a desired device such as the disc or hard disk drive as expected, do one  
of the following to select the startup device you want:  
Note: Not all discs, hard disk drives, or other removable devices are bootable.  
• To select a temporary startup device, do the following:  
Note: Selecting a startup device using the following method does not permanently change the startup  
sequence.  
1. Turn on or restart your server.  
2. When you see the logo screen, press F12 to display the boot menu. The boot device selection  
window opens. If your server is connected to a network and you want to start up the server from the  
network, press F10.  
3. In the boot device selection window, use the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard to switch  
between the selections. Press Enter to select the device of your choice. Then, the server will start  
up from the selected device.  
• To view or permanently change the configured startup device sequence, do the following:  
1. Start the Setup Utility program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
2. On the Boot Options menu, follow the instructions on the screen to set the startup device for Boot  
Option #1 to Boot Option #5 depending on your needs. You can also set the boot priority for various  
devices. See “Boot Options menu” on page 62.  
66 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program. The server will follow the startup device  
sequence you have set each time you turn on the server.  
Exiting the Setup Utility program  
After you finish viewing or changing settings, press Esc to return to the Setup Utility program main interface.  
If you are on a nested submenu, press Esc repeatedly until you reach the main interface. Then, you can  
do one of the following:  
• If you want to save the new settings and exit the Setup Utility program, press F10. Otherwise, your  
changes will not be saved.  
• If you do not want to save the new settings, select Exit ➙ Discard Changes and Exit.  
• If you want to return to the default settings, press F9 or select Exit ➙ Load Default Values.  
For more information about the Exit menu in the Setup Utility program, see “Exit menu” on page 64.  
Updating or recovering the BIOS  
This topic provides instructions on how to update the BIOS and how to recover from a POST and BIOS  
update failure.  
System programs are the basic layer of software built into your server. System programs include the POST,  
the UEFI BIOS, the Setup Utility program, and the BMC firmware. The POST is a set of tests and procedures  
that are performed each time you turn on your server. The UEFI BIOS is a layer of software that translates  
instructions from other layers of software into electrical signals that the server hardware can execute. You  
can use the Setup Utility program to view or change the configuration settings of your server. See “Using  
the Setup Utility program” on page 55. The BMC firmware works together with an iKVM key to provide  
advanced server management features.  
Your server system board has a module called electrically erasable programmable read-only memory  
(EEPROM, also referred to as flash memory). You can easily update the POST, the BIOS and BMC  
firmware, and the Setup Utility program by starting your server with a system-program-update disc or a  
bootable USB key.  
Lenovo might make changes and enhancements to the BIOS and BMC firmware. When updates are  
released, they are available for download on the Lenovo Support Web site at http://support.lenovo.com.  
Instructions for using the updates also are available in a TXT file on the same Web page with the updates.  
You can download a self-starting disc image (known as an ISO image) for the update program and create a  
system-program-update disc; or download a BIOS update package and copy all files in the package to a  
bootable USB key and start the server from the USB key.  
You can also use the Firmware Updater program to help you keep the server firmware up-to-date. See  
“Updating the firmware” on page 80.  
Downloading the BIOS update utility program  
Before updating or recovering your BIOS, you need to download a BIOS update utility program from the  
Lenovo Support Web site.  
To download the BIOS update utility program, do the following:  
Note: Lenovo maintains the Support Web site by making changes and improvements periodically. The  
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this topic.  
1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Click Download Drivers & Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to locate the BIOS  
update utility program.  
3. Download the ISO image or update package and the installation instructions in a TXT file.  
4. If you will use an ISO image to update the BIOS, use any CD or DVD burning software to create a  
bootable disc with the ISO image. If you will use an update package to update the BIOS, extract the  
package to a local drive and copy all the files to a bootable USB key.  
5. Print the TXT file that contains the installation instructions. You will need the instructions when  
performing the BIOS update or recovery procedure.  
Updating (flashing) the BIOS  
This topic provides instructions on how to update (flash) the BIOS.  
Notes:  
1. Update the BIOS on your server only if the newer BIOS version specifically solves a problem you  
have. We do not recommend BIOS updates for servers that do not need it. You can view the updated  
information for the new BIOS version in the installation instructions for the BIOS update utility program.  
See “Downloading the BIOS update utility program” on page 67.  
2. Downgrading the BIOS to an earlier version is not recommended and might not be supported. An earlier  
BIOS version might not contain the support for the latest system configurations.  
3. If the power to your server is interrupted while the POST and BIOS is being updated, your server  
might not restart correctly. Make sure that you perform the BIOS update procedure in an environment  
with a steady power supply. Besides, make sure that your server can restart successfully without  
encountering hardware problems.  
4. If you have updated the BIOS firmware, all the BIOS settings become the default settings of the updated  
BIOS version. You need to check and reconfigure the BIOS settings for your specific needs. You  
can note down your specific BIOS settings before updating the BIOS for an easier reconfiguration in  
the new BIOS version.  
To update (flash) the BIOS, do the following:  
1. Download a BIOS update utility program and its installation instructions from the Lenovo Support  
Web site. Then, make a bootable disc or a bootable USB key and print the TXT file that contains the  
installation instructions. See “Downloading the BIOS update utility program” on page 67.  
2. Turn on the server and press the F1 key as soon as you see the logo screen to start the Setup Utility  
program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
3. On the Security menu, check the BIOS Write Protect setting. To update (flash) the BIOS, the BIOS  
Write Protect item must be set to Disabled.  
4. Press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program. Then, follow the installation instructions to  
update (flash) the BIOS using a disc or USB key.  
5. The system will restart automatically after the update process is completed. Check and reconfigure  
the BIOS settings for your specific needs based on your note or refer to “Using the Setup Utility  
program” on page 55.  
Recovering from a BIOS update failure  
If the power to your server is interrupted while the BIOS is being updated, your server might not restart  
correctly. If this happens, perform the following procedure to recover from the BIOS update failure.  
To recover from a BIOS update failure, do the following:  
1. Download a BIOS update utility program and its installation instructions from the Lenovo Support  
Web site. Then, make a bootable disc or a bootable USB key and print the TXT file that contains the  
installation instructions. See “Downloading the BIOS update utility program” on page 67.  
68 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
3. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
4. Locate the BIOS recovery jumper on the system board. See “System board jumpers” on page 46.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your access to the BIOS recovery jumper.  
6. Move the BIOS recovery jumper from the normal position (pin 1 and pin 2) to the recovery position  
(pin 2 and pin 3).  
7. Reinstall any parts or reconnect any cables and reinstall the server cover. See “Completing the parts  
replacement” on page 168.  
8. Connect the server to an ac power source and then follow the installation instructions for the BIOS  
update utility program to start the server from the recovery image. The recovery window opens.  
9. Press Enter to start the recovery process. After the recovery process is completed, your server will  
automatically turn off.  
10. Repeat step 2 through step 5.  
11. Move the BIOS recovery jumper back to the normal position (pin 1 and pin 2).  
12. Reinstall any parts or reconnect any cables and reinstall the server cover. See “Completing the parts  
replacement” on page 168.  
13. Connect the server to an ac power source and turn on the server. The BIOS settings become the default  
settings of the updated BIOS version. You need to check and configure the BIOS settings for your  
specific needs. See “Using the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
This topic guides you to use the ThinkServer EasyStartup program to set up and configure your server.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring RAID and installing supported  
Windows and Linux operating systems and device drivers on your server. The program works in conjunction  
with your Windows or Linux operating system installation disc to automate the process of installing the  
operating system and associated device drivers. This program is provided with your server on a self-starting  
(bootable) ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD. The user guide for the program is also on the DVD and can be  
accessed directly from the program interface.  
If you do not have a ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD available, you can also download an ISO image from the  
Lenovo Support Web site and make a disc by yourself.  
To download the ThinkServer EasyStartup program image and burn it into a disc, do the following:  
Note: Lenovo maintains the Support Web site by making changes and improvements periodically. The  
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this topic.  
1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
2. Click Download Drivers & Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to locate the  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program.  
3. Download the ISO image for the ThinkServer EasyStartup program and the installation instructions in  
a TXT file.  
4. Use any DVD burning software to create a bootable disc with the ISO image.  
5. Print the TXT file that contains the installation instructions and follow the instructions to start the  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Features of the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
This topic lists the features of the ThinkServer EasyStartup program.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program has the following features:  
• Contained in a self-starting (bootable) DVD  
• Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface  
• Integrated help system and user guide  
• Automatic hardware detection  
• RAID configuration utility  
• Device drivers provided based on the server model and detected devices  
• Selectable partition size and file system type  
• Support for multiple operating systems  
• Ability to install the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save time  
• Ability to create a reuseable response file that can be used with similarly configured Lenovo servers to  
make future installations even faster  
Starting the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
This topic provides instructions on how to start the ThinkServer EasyStartup program. After you start the  
program and enter the main interface, click User Guide for detailed information about how to use this  
program to help you configure the server and install an operating system.  
To start the ThinkServer EasyStartup program, do the following:  
1. Insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD into the optical drive, set the optical drive as the first startup  
device, and start your server from the DVD in the optical drive. See “Selecting a startup device” on  
page 66.  
2. Wait for the program to load. Then, you will be prompted for the following selections:  
• The language in which you want to view the program  
• The language of the keyboard layout you will be using with the program  
Note: The supported languages and keyboard layouts for the ThinkServer EasyStartup program are  
German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Dutch, Turkish, and Japanese. Your ThinkServer EasyStartup  
DVD might be English only. In this case, the keyboard layout should be English.  
3. After selecting the language and keyboard layout, click OK. Then, you will see one or more reminders  
or messages about configuring storage devices. Click Next until you are presented with the Lenovo  
License Agreement. Read the Lenovo License Agreement carefully. In order to continue, you must agree  
with terms by clicking Agree. Then, the Date and time window opens.  
4. Set the current date and time and click OK. The Start option window opens.  
5. The Start option window provides the following selections:  
• Continue to the main interface.  
• Install the operating system using a pre-existing response file.  
• Configure RAID using a pre-existing response file.  
Read the explanations on the screen and select a desired option. Then, follow the instructions on the  
screen. If this is the first time you are using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program, select the option to  
continue to the main interface and view the compatibility notes and user guide.  
Notes:  
70 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Functionality and supported operating systems vary depending on the version of the ThinkServer  
EasyStartup program. From the main interface of the program, click Compatibility notes to view  
the information about the RAID controllers, operating systems, and server configurations supported  
by the specific version of the program and click User Guide to view the various functions and learn  
how to use the program.  
2. Before using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure any  
external storage devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program main interface provides the following menus on the left pane of  
the screen:  
• Home  
This menu is the welcome page that contains some general descriptions about the program and the  
Lenovo copyright and trademark statements.  
• Compatibility notes  
This menu provides information about the RAID controllers, operating systems, and server configurations  
supported by the version of the program you are using.  
• User Guide  
This menu provides information about the features of the program and instructions on how to use the  
program.  
• Hardware list  
This menu displays a list of hardware devices detected by the program.  
• Configure RAID  
This menu guides you to configure RAID or view the current RAID configuration and make changes  
if needed.  
• Install operating system  
This menu displays a series of choices and prompts to collect information required for operating system  
installation, prepares the hard disk drive for installation, and then initiates the installation process using  
your operating system installation disc.  
• About  
This menu provides the version information and legal notices.  
Configuring RAID  
This topic provides information about RAID and the utility programs that are available for you to configure  
RAID.  
This topic contains the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
“About RAID” on page 72  
“RAID for your server” on page 73  
“Configuring RAID using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on page 74  
“Configuring the onboard SATA software RAID” on page 74  
“Configuring the advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID” on page 79  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About RAID  
RAID, an acronym for Redundant Array of Independent Disks, is a technology that provides increased  
storage functions and reliability through redundancy. This is achieved by combining multiple hard disk drives  
into a logical unit, where data is distributed across the drives in one of several ways called RAID levels.  
When a group of independent physical hard disk drives are set up to use RAID technology, they are in a  
RAID array. This array distributes data across multiple hard disk drives, but the array appears to the host  
server as one single storage unit. Creating and using RAID arrays provides high performance, such as the  
expedited I/O performance, because several drives can be accessed simultaneously.  
RAID drive groups also improve data storage reliability and fault tolerance compared to single-drive storage  
systems. Data loss resulting from a drive failure can be prevented by reconstructing missing data from the  
remaining drives.  
The following list describes some of the most commonly used RAID levels:  
• RAID 0: block-level striping without parity or mirroring  
Simple stripe sets are normally referred to as RAID 0. RAID 0 uses striping to provide high data  
throughput, especially for large files in an environment that does not require fault tolerance. RAID 0 has no  
redundancy and it provides improved performance and additional storage without fault tolerance. Any  
drive failure destroys the array and the likelihood of failure increases with more drives in the array. RAID  
0 does not implement error checking, so any error is uncorrectable. More drives in the array means  
higher bandwidth, but greater risk of data loss.  
RAID 0 requires a minimum number of two hard disk drives.  
• RAID 1: mirroring without parity or striping  
RAID 1 uses mirroring so that data written to one drive is simultaneously written to another drive. This is  
good for small databases or other applications that require small capacity but complete data redundancy.  
RAID 1 provides fault tolerance from disk errors or failures and continues to operate as long as at least  
one drive in the mirrored set is functioning. With appropriate operating system support, there can be  
increased read performance and only a minimal write performance reduction.  
RAID 1 requires a minimum number of two hard disk drives.  
• RAID 5: block-level striping with distributed parity  
RAID 5 uses disk striping and parity data across all drives (distributed parity) to provide high data  
throughput, especially for small random access. RAID 5 distributes parity along with the data and requires  
all drives but one to be present to operate; drive failure requires replacement, but the array is not  
destroyed by a single drive failure. Upon drive failure, any subsequent read operations can be calculated  
from the distributed parity so that the drive failure is masked from the end user. The array will have data  
loss in the event of a second drive failure and is vulnerable until the data that was on the failing drive is  
rebuilt onto a replacement drive. A single drive failure in the set will result in reduced performance of  
the entire set until the failing drive has been replaced and rebuilt.  
RAID 5 requires a minimum number of three hard disk drives.  
• RAID 10: a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 1  
RAID 10 consists of striped data across mirrored spans. A RAID 10 drive group is a spanned drive  
group that creates a striped set from a series of mirrored drives. RAID 10 allows a maximum of eight  
spans. You must use an even number of drives in each RAID virtual drive in the span. The RAID 1  
virtual drives must have the same stripe size. RAID 10 provides high data throughput and complete data  
redundancy but uses a larger number of spans.  
RAID 10 requires a minimum number of four hard disk drives and also requires an even number of drives,  
for example, six hard disk drives or eight hard disk drives.  
72 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• RAID 50: a combination of RAID 0 and RAID 5  
RAID 50 uses distributed parity and disk striping. A RAID 50 drive group is a spanned drive group in  
which data is striped across multiple RAID 5 drive groups. RAID 50 works best with data that requires  
high reliability, high request rates, high data transfers, and medium-to-large capacity.  
Note: Having virtual drives of different RAID levels, such as RAID 0 and RAID 5, in the same drive group is  
not allowed. For example, if an existing RAID 5 virtual drive is created out of partial space in an array, the  
next virtual drive in the array has to be RAID 5 only.  
RAID 50 requires a minimum number of six hard disk drives.  
For detailed information about RAID, refer to “Introduction to RAID” in the MegaRAID SAS Software User  
Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server.  
RAID for your server  
This topic provides information about the RAID supported by your server.  
Your server supports the following two types of RAID configurations:  
• Onboard SATA software RAID configuration using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility  
program; and RAID management using the MegaRAID Storage Manager program  
The onboard SATA software RAID controller is integrated in the Intel C202 chip on the system board. If your  
server has SATA hard disk drives that are connected to the system board, you can use the LSI Software  
RAID Configuration Utility program to configure RAID. Your server supports onboard SATA software RAID  
levels 0, 1, and 10. You can also activate RAID level 5 by installing a ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5  
activation key. See “Installing or removing the ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key” on page 102.  
You can install and use the MegaRAID Storage Manager program to manage the RAID array and RAID  
controller in an operating system environment.  
For detailed information, see “Configuring the onboard SATA software RAID” on page 74.  
• Advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID configuration using the WebBIOS Configuration Utility  
program; and RAID management using the MegaRAID Storage Manager program and the MegaCLI  
Configuration Utility program (requires a RAID card)  
Some server models come with a required RAID card to provide advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID  
functions to the server. You can also purchase the RAID card from Lenovo and install it into server models  
that support the RAID card to get advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID functions. See “RAID card” on  
page 33 and “Installing or removing the RAID card” on page 98 for more information.  
Note: For server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use SAS hard disk drives,  
there must be a RAID card installed.  
The RAID card provides the WebBIOS Configuration Utility program to help you configure RAID  
independently of the operating system. You can also install the MegaRAID Storage Manager program and  
the MegaCLI Configuration Utility program to help you manage the RAID array and RAID controller in  
an operating system environment. The supported RAID levels are RAID 0, 1, and 10. To activate RAID  
5 and 50 levels, you need to install a RAID 5 key on the RAID card. See “Installing or removing the  
ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key” on page 100.  
For detailed information, see “Configuring the advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID” on page 79.  
Note: The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring supported RAID and  
installing supported operating systems and device drivers.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Before configuring RAID for your server, observe the following precautions:  
1. Use hard disk drives that have the same capacity within a single RAID array.  
2. Use hard disk drives that are of the same type (SATA or SAS) within a single RAID array.  
3. Depending on the operating system, the primary RAID might be limited to 2 TB total drive capacity.  
Configuring RAID using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring supported RAID and installing  
supported Windows and Linux operating systems and device drivers on your server. The user guide for the  
program can be accessed directly from the program interface.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program has the following features for RAID configuration:  
• For use with all supported RAID controllers  
• Automatically detects hardware and lists all supported RAID configurations  
• Configures one or more disk arrays per controller depending on the number of drives attached to the  
controller and the RAID level selected  
• Supports hot-spare drives  
• Creates a RAID response file that can be used to configure RAID controllers on similarly configured  
Lenovo servers  
See “Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on page 69 and view the user guide from the main  
interface of the program.  
Some RAID management software is also provided on the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD to help you manage  
RAID arrays and RAID controllers in an operating system environment. After you enter the operating system,  
insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD into the optical drive. The installation packages for the programs are  
located in the Utilities and Others folder in the root directory of the DVD. The ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD is  
designed for different types of servers and the Utilities and Others folder might contain additional installation  
packages that are not required to be installed into your server. For more information, see “Installing and  
using the MegaRAID Storage Manager program” on page 79 and “Configuring the advanced SATA or SAS  
hardware RAID” on page 79.  
Configuring the onboard SATA software RAID  
The onboard SATA software RAID controller is integrated in the Intel C202 chip on the system board. If your  
server has SATA hard disk drives that are connected to the system board, you can use the LSI Software  
RAID Configuration Utility program to configure RAID independently of the operating system. Your server  
supports onboard SATA software RAID levels 0, 1, and 10. You can also activate RAID 5 by installing  
a ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 activation key. See “Installing or removing the ThinkServer SATA  
Software RAID 5 Key” on page 102.  
You can install and use the MegaRAID Storage Manager program to manage the RAID array and RAID  
controller in an operating system environment.  
Starting the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program  
This topic provides instructions on how to start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program.  
To start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the Setup Utility program. See “Starting the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
2. On the Advanced menu, select SATA Configuration ➙ SATA Mode.  
3. Select RAID Mode. Then, press F10 to save settings and exit the Setup Utility program.  
74 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. When you see the message “Press Ctrl-M or Enter to run LSI Software RAID Setup Utility,” immediately  
press Ctrl+M or Enter to start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program.  
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program interface  
This topic provides information about the menus and items in the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility  
program. Depending on the version of the program, some menu or item information might differ slightly from  
the information in this topic.  
When working with the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, you must use the keyboard.  
The keys used to perform various tasks are displayed on the bottom of each screen. Use up and down  
arrow keys to navigate between items. For most items, the corresponding help message is displayed  
on the bottom of the screen when the item is selected. If the item has submenus, you can display the  
submenus by pressing Enter.  
After entering the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, you can see the Management Menu on  
the screen. The Management Menu contains the following menu items:  
• Configure  
This menu contains items to help you create a RAID array, view the current RAID configuration, add a new  
array, delete an existing array, or select a boot virtual drive.  
• Initialize  
This menu helps you initialize virtual drive(s).  
Note: Initializing a virtual drive erases all data on the virtual drive. Back up any data you want to keep and  
ensure the operating system is not installed on the virtual drive before the initialization.  
• Objects  
This menu helps you configure parameters for the RAID adapter or controller, the virtual drive(s), and the  
physical drive(s).  
• Rebuild  
This menu helps you rebuild a physical drive in an array in the event of a physical drive failure. You can  
choose to rebuild the data on the failing drive if the drive is still operational. If the drive is not operational,  
it must be replaced and the data on the failing drive must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system  
to fault tolerance. If hot-spare drives are available, the failing drive might be rebuilt automatically without  
any user intervention.  
• Check Consistency  
This menu helps you do consistency check for the virtual drive(s). The consistency check verifies the  
correctness of the data on virtual drive(s) that use RAID 1, 5, and 10.  
The following table shows the various menus and items in the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility  
program. On each menu, press the Enter key to show selectable options and select a desired option by  
using up and down arrow keys or type desired values from the keyboard directly.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Submenu item  
Easy Configuration  
Comments  
Configure  
Create physical arrays. An array will  
automatically become a virtual drive.  
New Configuration  
Clear the existing configuration and  
start a new configuration.  
View/Add Configuration  
View the existing configuration or add a  
new configuration.  
Clear Configuration  
Select Boot Drive  
Varies by configuration.  
Adapter  
Clear the existing configuration.  
Select a boot virtual drive.  
Initialize virtual drives.  
Initialize  
Objects  
Set adapter related parameters, such  
as rebuild rate, consistency check rate,  
auto-rebuild, and so on.  
Virtual Drive  
Set virtual drive parameters.  
Physical Drive  
Set physical drive parameters, such as  
creating a hot-spare drive for the virtual  
drive, making a failing drive as online,  
changing a drive state, and viewing the  
specifications of a physical drive.  
Rebuild  
Varies by configuration.  
Varies by configuration.  
Rebuild physical drive(s).  
Check Consistency  
Check consistency of virtual drive(s).  
Creating, adding, or deleting a RAID array  
This topic provides instructions on how to create, add, or delete a RAID array using the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program.  
Note: Before you create a RAID array using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, make sure  
that the server meets the required hardware configuration. For example, the server needs to have the  
required number of SATA hard disk drives installed and connected to the system board. See “About RAID”  
on page 72 for information about the required number of hard disk drives for each RAID level. If you want to  
create a RAID 5 array using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, the server also needs to  
have a ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key installed on the system board. See “Installing or removing the  
ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key” on page 102.  
To create, add, or delete a RAID array using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do the  
following:  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, do one of the following depending on your needs:  
• If you want to create a RAID array, select Easy Configuration and then follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
• If you want to add a secondary RAID configuration, select View/Add Configuration and then follow  
the instructions on the screen to view the current configuration and add a new configuration.  
• If you want to delete the existing RAID configuration, exit the program and back up all your data on  
the hard disk drives. After backing up all your data, enter the program main interface and select Clear  
Configuration. Select Yes when prompted and follow the instructions on the screen.  
76 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: Deleting the existing RAID configuration erases all data on the virtual drive. Make sure that  
you back up all data before deleting the RAID array. If the operating system is installed on the virtual  
drive you want to delete, you need to reinstall the operating system after completing the operation.  
• If you want to delete the existing RAID configuration and make a new configuration, exit the program  
and back up all your data on the hard disk drives. After backing up all your data, enter the program  
main interface and select New Configuration. Select Yes when prompted to proceed and then  
follow the instructions on the screen.  
Attention: Deleting the existing RAID configuration erases all data on the virtual drive. Make sure that  
you back up all data before deleting the RAID array. If the operating system is installed on the virtual  
drive you want to delete, you need to reinstall the operating system after completing the operation.  
Initializing a virtual drive  
This topic provides instructions on how to initialize a virtual drive using the LSI Software RAID Configuration  
Utility program after completing the configuration process.  
Virtual drive initialization is the process of writing zeros to the data fields of a virtual drive and, in fault-tolerant  
RAID levels, generating the corresponding parity to put the virtual drive in a ready state. Initialization erases  
all data on the virtual drive. Drive groups will work without being initialized, but they can fail a consistency  
check because the parity fields have not been generated.  
Notes:  
1. Make sure that you back up any data you want to keep before initializing a virtual drive.  
2. Make sure that the operating system is not installed on the virtual drive you are initializing. Otherwise,  
you need to reinstall the operating system after completing the operation.  
To initialize a virtual drive using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, select Initialize and follow the instructions on the screen.  
Setting a hot-spare drive  
This topic provides instructions on how to set a physical drive as a hot-spare drive using the LSI Software  
RAID Configuration Utility program.  
A hot-spare drive is an extra, unused drive that is part of the disk subsystem. It is usually in standby  
mode and ready for service if a drive fails. Setting hot-spare drives enables you to replace failing drives  
without performing a system shutdown operation. For a detailed introduction to hot-spare drives, refer to  
“Introduction to RAID” in the MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes  
with your server.  
To set a physical drive as a hot-spare drive using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program,  
do the following:  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. Do one of the following:  
• If you want to create or add a new RAID array, you can set a hot-spare drive during the configuration  
process by following the instructions on the screen.  
• If you want to set a hot-spare drive right after the configuration, select Objects ➙ Physical Drive  
from the program main interface. Then, select the physical drive that you want to set as a hot-spare  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
drive and press Enter. A submenu is displayed. Select Make Hot Spare from the submenu and then  
select Yes when prompted to set the physical drive as a hot-spare drive.  
Rebuilding a physical drive  
This topic provides instructions on how to rebuild a physical drive using the LSI Software RAID Configuration  
Utility program when a physical drive in an array fails.  
When a drive in a RAID drive group fails, you can rebuild the drive by recreating the data that was stored on  
the drive before it fails. If the drive is not operational, it must be replaced and the data on the failing drive  
must be rebuilt on a new drive to restore the system to fault tolerance. If hot-spare drives are available, the  
failing drive might be rebuilt automatically without any user intervention.  
The RAID controller recreates the data using the data stored on other drives in the drive group. Rebuilding  
can be done only in drive groups with data redundancy, such as RAID 1, 5, and 10 drive groups. For a  
detailed introduction to disk rebuild, refer to “Introduction to RAID” in the MegaRAID SAS Software User  
Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server.  
To rebuild a physical drive using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program when a physical  
drive in an array fails, do the following:  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, select Rebuild and follow the instructions on the screen.  
Note: Running a consistency check immediately after the rebuild completes to ensure data integrity for the  
virtual drives. See “Running a consistency check” on page 78.  
The rebuild rate is the percentage of the computing cycles dedicated to rebuilding failing drives. A rebuild  
rate of 100 percent means that the system gives priority to rebuilding the failing drives. The rebuild rate can  
be configured between 0 percent and 100 percent. At 0 percent, the rebuild is done only if the system is not  
doing anything else. At 100 percent, the rebuild has a higher priority than any other system activity.  
To configure the rebuild rate using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do the following:  
Note: Using a rebuild rate of 0 or 100 percent is not recommended. The default value is 30 percent.  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, select Objects ➙ Adapter ➙ Rebuild Rate.  
Note: Use up and down arrow keys to navigate between items and press Enter to select an option.  
3. Set the rebuild rate by typing a desired value from the keyboard directly.  
Running a consistency check  
This topic provides instructions on how to run a consistency check for virtual drives using the LSI Software  
RAID Configuration Utility program.  
A consistency check is an operation that verifies that all stripes on a virtual drive with a redundant RAID  
level are consistent. The consistency check operation verifies correctness of the data on virtual drives that  
use RAID 1, 5, and 10 (RAID 0 does not provide data redundancy). For example, in a system with parity,  
checking consistency means computing the data on one drive and comparing the results to the contents of  
the parity drive.  
You should run a consistency check on fault-tolerant virtual drives periodically. It is recommended that you  
run a consistency check at least once a month. You must run a consistency check if you suspect that the  
78 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
virtual drive data might be corrupted. Be sure to back up the data before running a consistency check if you  
suspect the data might be corrupted.  
To run a consistency check using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do the following:  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, select Check Consistency and follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
The consistency check rate is the rate at which consistency check operations are run on a system. The  
consistency check rate can be configured between 0 percent and 100 percent. At 0 percent, the consistency  
check is done only if the system is not doing anything else. At 100 percent, the consistency check has a  
higher priority than any other system activity.  
To configure the consistency check rate using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program, do  
the following:  
Note: Using a consistency check rate of 0 or 100 percent is not recommended. The default value is 30  
percent.  
1. Start the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program. See “Starting the LSI Software RAID  
Configuration Utility program” on page 74.  
2. On the main interface of the program, select Objects ➙ Adapter ➙ Chk Const Rate.  
Note: Use up and down arrow keys to navigate between items and press Enter to select an option.  
3. Set the consistency check rate by typing a desired value from the keyboard directly.  
Installing and using the MegaRAID Storage Manager program  
You can install and use the MegaRAID Storage Manager program to manage the RAID array and RAID  
controller in an operating system environment after configuring RAID.  
The installation package for the MegaRAID Storage Manager program is on the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
DVD. After you enter the operating system, insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD into the optical drive.  
The installation package for the MegaRAID Storage Manager program is located in the Utilities and Others  
folder in the root directory of the DVD.  
To install and use the MegaRAID Storage Manager program, refer to the following chapters in the MegaRAID  
SAS Software User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server:  
Note: Some information in these chapters might be intended for the advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID  
configurations and might not apply to the onboard SATA software configurations.  
• “MegaRAID Storage Manager Overview and Installation”  
• “MegaRAID Storage Manager Window and Menus”  
• “Monitoring System Events and Storage Devices”  
• “Maintaining and Managing Storage Configurations”  
The MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide is also available on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
Configuring the advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID  
Some server models come with a required RAID card to provide advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID  
functions to the server. You can also purchase the RAID card from Lenovo and install it into server models  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
that support the RAID card to get advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID functions. See “RAID card” on page  
33 and “Installing or removing the RAID card” on page 98 for more information.  
Note: For server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use SAS hard disk drives, there  
must be a RAID card installed.  
The RAID card provides the WebBIOS Configuration Utility program to help you configure RAID  
independently of the operating system. You can also install the MegaRAID Storage Manager program and  
the MegaCLI Configuration Utility program to help you manage the RAID array and RAID controller in an  
operating system environment. The supported RAID levels are RAID 0, 1, and 10. To activate RAID 5 and  
50 levels, you need to install a RAID 5 key on the RAID card. See “Installing or removing the ThinkServer  
9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key” on page 100.  
The installation packages for the MegaRAID Storage Manager program and the MegaCLI Configuration  
Utility program are on the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD. After you enter the operating system, insert the  
ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD into the optical drive. The installation packages for the programs are located in  
the Utilities and Others folder in the root directory of the DVD.  
Note: The ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD is designed for different types of servers and the Utilities and Others  
folder might contain additional installation packages that are not required to be installed into your server.  
For instructions on how to configure and manage the advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID, refer to  
the MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server. This  
document is also available on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
Configuring the Ethernet controllers  
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an interface for connecting to  
a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps network and provide full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables  
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the network.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the Ethernet controllers. However, you must install a device  
driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring RAID and installing supported  
operating systems and device drivers on your server. See “Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program”  
on page 69.  
The device drivers for onboard Ethernet controllers are also available for download at  
http://support.lenovo.com. To download the drivers, click Download Drivers & Software and then follow  
the instructions on the Web page.  
Updating the firmware  
The firmware in the server is periodically updated and is available for download on the Lenovo Support  
Web site.  
Go to http://support.lenovo.com, click Download Drivers & Software, and then follow the instructions on the  
Web page to check for the latest level of firmware, such as the BIOS and BMC updates and device drivers.  
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the server with the latest version  
of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device or reflash the BIOS, the BMC firmware, and the  
FRU/SDR from a disc image.  
80 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the Firmware Updater program  
The Firmware Updater program enables you to maintain your system firmware up-to-date and helps you  
avoid unnecessary outages.  
To update your system firmware using the Firmware Updater program, do the following:  
Note: Lenovo maintains the Support Web site by making changes and improvements periodically. The  
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this topic.  
1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
2. Click Download Drivers & Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to locate the  
Firmware Updater program.  
3. Download the ISO image for the Firmware Updater program and the installation instructions in a TXT file.  
4. Use any CD or DVD burning software to create a bootable disc with the ISO image.  
5. Print the TXT file that contains the installation instructions and follow the instructions to use the Firmware  
Updater program to update your system firmware.  
Notes:  
1. Before distributing the firmware updates to a server, ensure that your server can restart successfully  
without encountering hardware problems.  
2. If you have updated the BIOS firmware, all the BIOS settings become the default settings of the updated  
BIOS version. You need to check and reconfigure the BIOS settings for your specific needs.  
Chapter 5. Configuring the server 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
82 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware  
This chapter provides instructions on how to install, remove, or replace hardware for your server.  
This chapter contains the following items:  
•
•
•
•
•
“Guidelines” on page 83  
“Removing the server cover” on page 85  
“Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87  
“Installing, removing, or replacing hardware” on page 89  
“Completing the parts replacement” on page 168  
For a list of the ThinkServer options, go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver. Click the Products tab and  
then click Options to view the supported server option information.  
Guidelines  
This topic provides some guidelines that you should read and understand before using your server.  
Precautions  
Before you use the server, be sure to read and understand the following precautions:  
• Before using the product, be sure to read and understand the multilingual safety instructions and the  
Lenovo Limited Warranty (LLW) on the documentation DVD that comes with the product. Reading and  
understanding the safety instructions reduces the risk of personal injury and damage to your product.  
• When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply the most recent firmware  
updates. This step will help to ensure that any known issues are addressed and that your server is  
ready to function at maximum levels of performance. To download firmware updates for your server,  
do the following:  
1. Go to http://support.lenovo.com.  
2. Click Download Drivers & Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to download  
firmware updates for your server.  
See “Updating the firmware” on page 80 for more information.  
• Before you install optional hardware devices, make sure that the server is working correctly. If the  
server is not working correctly, see Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting and diagnostics” on page 171 to do  
basic troubleshooting. If the problem cannot be solved, see Chapter 9 “Getting information, help, and  
service” on page 213.  
• Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Put removed covers and other parts  
in a safe place.  
• If you must turn on the server while the server cover is removed, make sure that no one is near the server  
and that no tools or other objects have been left inside the server.  
• Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to lift a heavy object,  
observe the following precautions:  
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.  
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.  
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy object.  
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical outlets for the server,  
monitor, and other devices.  
• Back up all important data before you make changes to drives.  
• Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.  
• You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace a hot-swap redundant power supply module,  
hot-swap hard disk drives, or hot-plug USB devices. However, you must turn off the server before  
performing any steps that involve installing, removing, or replacing adapter cables or non-hot-swap  
devices or components.  
• To view the LEDs on the system board and internal components, leave the server connected to power.  
• When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards, labels, and ground wires.  
• When working inside the server, you might find some tasks easier if you lay the server on its side.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Do not open the static-protective package that contains the new part until the defective part has been  
removed from the server and you are ready to install the new part. Static electricity, although harmless to you,  
can seriously damage server components and parts.  
When you handle server parts and components, take these precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:  
• Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.  
• The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD)  
wrist strap, if one is available. Make sure that you work in an ESD-safe area.  
• Always carefully handle the parts and other components (such as PCI cards, memory modules, system  
boards, and microprocessors) by its edges or its frame. Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed  
circuitry.  
• Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.  
• Before you replace a new part, touch the static-protective package containing the new part to an  
unpainted metal part of the server for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity from the  
package and your body.  
• Remove the new part from the static-protective package and directly install it in the server without  
placing it on any other surface. If it is hard for you to do this in your specific situation, place the  
static-protective package of the new part on a smooth, level surface, and then place the new part on  
the static-protective package.  
• Do not place the part on the server cover or other metal surface.  
• Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces indoor humidity  
and increases static electricity.  
System reliability guidelines  
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that you follow these guidelines:  
• Each of the drive bays has a drive or a dummy tray installed; or there is an electromagnetic interface (EMI)  
protective panel or EMI shield installed to protect the drive cage.  
• If the server has redundant power, each of the power supply module bay has a redundant power supply  
module installed, or one bay has a module while the other bay is covered by a shield.  
• Leave adequate space around the server to make sure that the server cooling system works well. Leave  
approximately 50 mm (2 inches) of open space around the front and rear of the server. Do not place  
objects in front of the fans. For proper cooling and airflow, install the server cover before you turn on  
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with the server  
cover removed might damage server components.  
84 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Properly route the cables. For some options, such as PCI cards, follow the cabling instructions that come  
with the options in addition to the instructions in this manual.  
• Make sure that you replace a failing fan within 48 hours.  
• When replacing a hot-swap drive, install the new hot-swap drive within two minutes of removal.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when the server is turned on might cause  
the server to halt, which might result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an ESD wrist strap  
or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the power on.  
The server supports hot-swap devices and is designed to operate safely while it is turned on and the cover is  
removed. Follow these guidelines when you work inside the server with the power on:  
• Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before working inside  
the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the server.  
• Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.  
• Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist watches.  
• Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils. These items might fall into the server as  
you lean over it.  
• Avoid dropping any metallic objects into the server, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws.  
Removing the server cover  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the server cover.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To remove the server cover, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives. Then, turn off all attached devices and the server.  
2. Disconnect all power cords from electrical outlets.  
3. Disconnect the power cord(s), Input/Output (I/O) cables, and all other cables that are connected to  
the server.  
4. Remove any locking device that secures the server cover, such as a padlock or an integrated cable  
lock. See “Server locks” on page 22.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Loosen the thumbscrew that secures the server cover and then slide the server cover to the rear until it  
is stopped.  
Notes:  
a. The server cover is securely installed and you need to use a tool, such as a screwdriver, to loosen  
the thumbscrew that secures the server cover. The thumbscrew is an integrated part of the server  
cover and do not try to remove the thumbscrew from the server cover.  
b. It is recommended that you wait three to five minutes to let the server cool before removing the  
server cover.  
Figure 32. Sliding the server cover to the rear  
86 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Pivot the server cover outward to completely remove it.  
Figure 33. Removing the server cover  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, install the server cover before turning on the server. Operating the  
server for more than 30 minutes with the server cover removed might damage server components.  
To reinstall the server cover, see “Reinstalling the server cover and reconnecting cables” on page 168.  
Removing and reinstalling the front bezel  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove and reinstall the front bezel.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To remove and reinstall the front bezel, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Remove the front bezel by releasing the three plastic tabs on the left side and pivoting the front bezel  
outward.  
Figure 34. Removing the front bezel  
88 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. To reinstall the front bezel, align the other three plastic tabs on the right side of the front bezel with  
the corresponding holes in the chassis, then pivot the front bezel inward until it snaps into position  
on the left side.  
Figure 35. Installing the front bezel  
5. Go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing, removing, or replacing hardware  
This topic provides instructions on how to install, remove, or replace hardware for your server. You can  
expand the capabilities of your server by adding new hardware devices, such as memory modules, PCI  
cards, or other server options, and maintain your server by replacing the failing hardware devices.  
If you are handling a server option, refer to the appropriate installation and or removal instructions in this  
topic along with the instructions that come with the option.  
Notes:  
1. Use only parts provided by Lenovo.  
2. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
Installing or removing a memory module  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove a memory module.  
For a list of the ThinkServer memory module options, go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver. Click the  
Products tab and then click Options ➙ ThinkServer Memory to view the information.  
Note: The memory modules are extremely sensitive to ESD. Make sure that you read and understand  
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 84 first and carefully perform the operation.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Memory module installation rules  
Your server has four memory slots for installing or replacing DDR3 UDIMMs with ECC technology.  
• Supports 2 GB and 4 GB 1333 MHz DDR3 UDIMMs  
• Single-rank or dual-rank  
• Minimum system memory: 2 GB (only one 2 GB memory module installed in the DIMMA2 slot)  
• Maximum system memory: 16 GB (one 4 GB memory module installed in each of the four memory slots)  
The following illustration helps you to locate the memory slots on the system board.  
Figure 36. Memory slots on the system board  
1 Memory slot 4 (DIMMB2)  
3 Memory slot 2 (DIMMA2)  
2 Memory slot 3 (DIMMB1)  
4 Memory slot 1 (DIMMA1)  
The following table provides information about the memory module installation rules that you should  
consider when installing or removing a memory module. The “X” mark indicates the memory slot(s) into  
which the memory module(s) should be installed in different situations. The numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 indicate  
the installation sequence.  
Note: The installed memory modules must be the same type with the same voltage and frequency.  
UDIMM  
One UDIMM  
DIMMA1  
DIMMA2  
X
DIMMB1  
DIMMB2  
Two UDIMMs  
Three UDIMMs  
Four UDIMMs  
X, 1  
X, 1  
X, 1  
X, 2  
X, 2  
X, 2  
X, 3  
X, 3  
X, 4  
90 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing a memory module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install a memory module.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. To optimize system performance, make sure that you consider and follow the memory module  
installation rules when performing the operation. See “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
2. Use any documentation that comes with the memory module and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install a memory module, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the memory slots on the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might prevent your access to the memory slots.  
6. Open the retaining clips of the appropriate memory slot. See “Memory module installation rules” on  
page 90 for the installation sequence information.  
Figure 37. Opening the retaining clips of the memory slots  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new memory module to any unpainted surface on  
the outside of the server. Then, take the new memory module out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the memory module by its edges.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Position the new memory module over the memory slot. Make sure that the notch 1 on the new memory  
module is aligned with the key 2 in the memory slot. Then, press the new memory module straight down  
into the memory slot until the retaining clips close and the new memory module snaps into position.  
Note: If there is a gap between the memory module and the retaining clips, the memory module has  
not been correctly installed. Open the retaining clips, remove the memory module, and then reinstall it  
into the memory slot until the retaining clips are completely closed.  
Figure 38. Installing a memory module  
9. Reinstall any parts or reconnect any cables you have removed.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Removing a memory module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove a memory module.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: To optimize system performance, make sure that you consider and follow the memory module  
installation rules when performing the operation. See “Memory module installation rules” on page 90.  
To remove a memory module, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the memory slots on the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might prevent your access to the memory slots.  
92 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Locate the appropriate memory module that you want to remove and open the retaining clips on both  
ends of the memory slot. Then, grasp the memory module by its edges and carefully pull it straight  
up to remove it from the memory slot.  
Figure 39. Removing a memory module  
7. If you are instructed to return the old memory module, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing or removing a PCI card  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove a PCI card.  
The EMI integrity and cooling of the server are protected by having all drive bays and PCI card slots covered  
or occupied. When you install an internal drive or PCI card, save the EMI shield or drive bay filler from the  
drive bay or save the PCI card slot bracket in the event that you later remove the device.  
Attention: An unoccupied drive bay or PCI card slot without cover, shield, filler, or any other protection might  
impact the EMI integrity and cooling of the server, which might result in overheating or component damage.  
Note: The PCI cards are extremely sensitive to ESD. Make sure that you read and understand “Handling  
static-sensitive devices” on page 84 first and carefully perform the operation.  
Installing a PCI card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install a PCI card.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the PCI card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install a PCI card, do the following:  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate an appropriate PCI card slot on the system board. See “System board components” on page  
42 to identify the different types of PCI card slots in your server.  
5. Remove the PCI card slot bracket by removing the screw that secures the metal bracket and then lifting  
the bracket out of the chassis. Store the PCI card slot bracket in the event that you later remove the PCI  
card and need the bracket to cover the place.  
Note: Carefully place the removed screw aside. You will need the screw later to secure the PCI card in  
place.  
Figure 40. Removing a PCI card slot bracket  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new PCI card to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the new PCI card out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the PCI card by its edges.  
94 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Position the new PCI card on the PCI card slot for which you have removed the slot bracket and then  
carefully press the PCI card straight down until it is securely seated in the slot. Install the screw to  
secure the PCI card in place.  
Note: Your PCI card might look different from the following illustration depending on the specific type.  
Figure 41. Installing a PCI card  
8. Depending on the type of the PCI card, you might need to connect any required cables. Refer to the  
documentation that comes with the PCI card for specific information.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Removing a PCI card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove a PCI card.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the PCI card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To remove a PCI card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Locate the PCI card you want to remove. See “System board components” on page 42.  
5. If necessary, remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your access to the PCI card.  
Depending on the type of the PCI card, you might also need to disconnect any cables from the PCI  
card, the system board, and or the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
6. Remove the screw that secures the PCI card. Then, grasp the PCI card by its edges and carefully  
pull it out of the PCI card slot.  
Note: The PCI card fits tightly into the PCI card slot. If necessary, alternate moving each side of the PCI  
card a small and equal amount until it is completely removed from the slot.  
Figure 42. Removing a PCI card  
7. Install a new PCI card to replace the old one or install a PCI card slot bracket to cover the place.  
See “Installing a PCI card” on page 93.  
8. If you are instructed to return the old PCI card, follow all packaging instructions and use any packaging  
materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing or removing the Ethernet card  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the Ethernet card.  
Installing the Ethernet card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the Ethernet card and how to install the Ethernet card  
driver on Windows operating systems.  
96 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the Ethernet card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install the Ethernet card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate an appropriate PCI card slot on the system board for installing the Ethernet card. You can  
install the Ethernet card to the PCI-E slot 2 or PCI-E slot 3 that supports a card with 167 mm (6.57  
inches) in length. See “System board components” on page 42 to identify the different types of PCI  
card slots in your server.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the Ethernet card to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the Ethernet card out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the Ethernet card by its edges.  
7. The Ethernet card is a kind of PCI card. See “Installing a PCI card” on page 93 and follow those  
instructions to install the Ethernet card.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, continue with  
the following procedure to install the Ethernet card driver if you are using a Windows operating system.  
On Linux operating systems, you do not need to install any device driver for the Ethernet card.  
On Windows operating systems, do the following to install the device driver for the Ethernet card:  
1. Save any open documents and exit all applications.  
2. Click Start. Rright-click My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties window opens.  
3. Click the Device Manager button on the Hardware tab. The Device Manager window opens.  
4. Expand the Network adapters.  
5. Right-click one of the Ethernet cards (PRO/1000PT or the yellow question mark).  
6. Select Update Driver. The Hardware Update Wizard window opens. You will be asked if you permit  
Windows to connect to Windows Update to search for software.  
7. Make a selection depending on your needs and click Next.  
8. Insert the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD that comes with your server into the optical drive.  
Note: You do not need to use the driver disc that comes with the Ethernet card.  
9. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next to continue.  
10. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.  
Removing the Ethernet card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the Ethernet card.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the Ethernet card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To remove the Ethernet card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the Ethernet card. The Ethernet card can be in the PCI-E slot 2 or the PCI-E slot 3 that supports  
a card with 167 mm (6.57 inches) in length. See “System board components” on page 42.  
5. The Ethernet card is a kind of PCI card. See “Removing a PCI card” on page 95 and follow those  
instructions to remove the Ethernet card.  
6. If you are instructed to return the old Ethernet card, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing or removing the RAID card  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the RAID card.  
A specific RAID card is required for server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use  
SAS hard disk drives. You can also install the RAID card for advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID functions.  
For more information, see “RAID card” on page 33 and “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Note: This topic applies only to models that support the RAID card.  
Installing the RAID card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the RAID card.  
Attention: Make sure that you back up your data before installing the RAID card because you might need to  
reconfigure RAID and reinstall the operating system after installing the RAID card.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the RAID card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install the RAID card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
98 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the PCI-E slot 3 on the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the RAID card to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the RAID card out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the RAID card by its edges.  
7. The RAID card is a kind of PCI card. See “Installing a PCI card” on page 93 and follow those instructions  
to install the RAID card.  
8. Connect cables depending on your specific server configuration. See “Connecting cables” on page 38.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, configure  
RAID for your server. See “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Removing the RAID card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the RAID card.  
Attention: Make sure that you back up your data before removing the RAID card because you might need to  
reconfigure RAID and reinstall the operating system after removing the RAID card. If you remove the RAID  
card, you will lose the advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID functions. Also, a specific RAID card is required  
for server models with more than four hard disk drives or models that use SAS hard disk drives.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the RAID card and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To remove the RAID card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the RAID card, which is installed in the PCI-E slot 3 on the system board. See “System board  
components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
6. Disconnect all cables from the RAID card and any other related parts.  
Note: If you want to install a new RAID card after removing the old one, note down the cable  
connections before disconnecting the cables.  
7. The RAID card is a kind of PCI card. See “Removing a PCI card” on page 95 and follow those  
instructions to remove the RAID card.  
Note: Carefully handle the RAID card by its edges.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Depending on your specific server configuration, you might need to connect the SATA hard disk drives  
to the SATA connectors on the system board if no RAID card is installed. See “Connecting cables”  
on page 38.  
9. If you are instructed to return the old RAID card, follow all packaging instructions and use any packaging  
materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, you  
need to reconfigure RAID for your server. See “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key  
(hereinafter referred to as the RAID 5 key).  
The RAID 5 key expands the capability of the installed RAID card (ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 0/1 Adapter)  
by activating RAID 5 and 50 levels for advanced SATA/SAS hardware RAID. You can purchase a RAID 5  
key directly from Lenovo.  
Installing the RAID 5 key on the RAID card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the RAID 5 key on the RAID card.  
Note: This topic applies only to models that have a RAID card installed.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the RAID 5 key and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install the RAID 5 key on the RAID card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the RAID card, which is installed in the PCI-E slot 3 on the system board. See “System board  
components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the RAID 5 key to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the RAID 5 key out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the RAID 5 key by its edges.  
100 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Locate the RAID 5 key connector on the RAID card and then insert the RAID 5 key into the connector.  
You might want to remove the RAID card first, install the RAID 5 key on the RAID card, and then reinstall  
the RAID card. See “Installing or removing the RAID card” on page 98.  
Note: Make sure that the RAID 5 key is securely seated on the RAID card.  
Figure 43. Installing the RAID 5 key on the RAID card  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, the hardware  
RAID 5 and 50 levels are available for your server if your server has the required number of hard disk  
drives installed. Refer to the MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes  
with your server for information about how to configure the hardware RAID.  
Removing the RAID 5 key from the RAID card  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the RAID 5 key from the RAID card.  
Notes:  
1. This topic applies only to server models that have a RAID card with the RAID 5 key option installed.  
2. If you remove the RAID 5 key from the RAID card, the hardware RAID 5 and 50 levels are not available.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the RAID 5 key and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To remove the RAID 5 key from the RAID card, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the RAID card, which is installed in the PCI-E slot 3 on the system board. See “System board  
components” on page 42.  
5. Remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
6. Locate the RAID 5 key on the RAID card and then remove it from the RAID card. You might need to  
remove the RAID card first, remove the RAID 5 key from the RAID card, and then reinstall the RAID card.  
See “Installing or removing the RAID card” on page 98.  
Note: Carefully handle the RAID 5 key by its edges.  
Figure 44. Removing the RAID 5 key from the RAID card  
7. If you are instructed to return the old RAID 5 key, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. As the  
hardware RAID 5 and 50 levels are not available without the RAID 5 key, you might need to reconfigure  
RAID for your server. Refer to the MegaRAID SAS Software User Guide on the documentation DVD that  
comes with your server for information about how to configure the hardware RAID.  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 Key  
(hereinafter referred to as the system board RAID 5 key).  
The system board RAID 5 key expands the capability of the system board by activating RAID 5 for the  
onboard SATA software RAID. You can purchase a system board RAID 5 key directly from Lenovo.  
Installing the system board RAID 5 key  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the system board RAID 5 key.  
102 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the system board RAID 5 key and follow those instructions in  
addition to the instructions in this topic.  
To install the system board RAID 5 key, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board RAID 5 key to any unpainted  
surface on the outside of the server. Then, take the system board RAID 5 key out of the package.  
5. Locate the iButton socket on the system board. Insert one side of the system board RAID 5 key under  
one of the retaining clips on the iButton socket. Then, carefully press the other side of the system  
board RAID 5 key straight down until the key snaps into position and is secured by the two retaining  
clips on the iButton socket.  
Note: If necessary, remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
Figure 45. Installing the system board RAID 5 key  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, the onboard  
SATA software RAID 5 is available for your server if your server has the required number of hard disk  
drives installed. To configure RAID, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Removing the system board RAID 5 key  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the system board RAID 5 key.  
Notes:  
1. This topic applies only to servers that have a system board RAID 5 key option installed.  
2. If you remove the system board RAID 5 key, the onboard SATA software RAID 5 will be disabled.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the system board RAID 5 key and follow those instructions in  
addition to the instructions in this topic.  
To remove the system board RAID 5 key, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
104 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Locate the iButton socket on the system board. Open the retaining clip 1 on the iButton socket to  
release the system board RAID 5 key and then completely remove the key from the iButton socket.  
Note: If necessary, remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your operation.  
Figure 46. Removing the system board RAID 5 key  
5. If you are instructed to return the old system board RAID 5 key, follow all packaging instructions and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. As the  
onboard SATA software RAID 5 is not available without the system board RAID 5 key, you might need to  
reconfigure RAID for your server. See “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Installing or removing the ThinkServer iKVM Remote Management  
Module  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the ThinkServer iKVM Remote Management  
Module (hereinafter referred to as the iKVM key).  
The iKVM key offers convenient, remote KVM access and control through the LAN or Internet. You can use  
the iKVM key to gain location-independent remote access to respond to critical incidents and to undertake  
necessary maintenance. Therefore, working as an integrated solution in your server, the iKVM key provides  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
an increased level of manageability over the basic server management available to the system board. You  
can purchase an iKVM key directly from Lenovo.  
Installing the iKVM key  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the iKVM key.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the iKVM key and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install the iKVM key, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the iKVM key to any unpainted surface on the outside  
of the server. Then, take the iKVM key out of the package.  
106 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Locate the iKVM key connector on the system board and then insert the iKVM key into the iKVM key  
connector.  
Note: Make sure that the iKVM key is securely seated on the system board.  
Figure 47. Installing the iKVM key  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, you can refer  
to the Remote Management Module User Guide on the documentation DVD that comes with your server  
for more information about the iKVM function and server remote management.  
Removing the iKVM key  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the iKVM key if the server has one installed.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes:  
1. Use any documentation that comes with the iKVM key and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
2. If you remove the iKVM key, the iKVM function for server remote management is unavailable.  
To remove the iKVM key, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the iKVM key on the system board and then lift the iKVM key straight up to remove it from the  
iKVM key connector.  
Figure 48. Removing the iKVM key  
5. If you are instructed to return the old iKVM key, follow all packaging instructions and use any packaging  
materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
108 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing or removing the TPM module  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the TPM module.  
The TPM module is a security chip designed by the Trusted Computing Group (TCG) to provide a hardware  
method of data encryption. It stores passwords, encryption keys, and digital certificates to help provide  
security solutions and protect the computer.  
Installing the TPM module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the TPM module.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Use any documentation that comes with the TPM module and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install the TPM module, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the TPM module to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the TPM module out of the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the TPM module by its edges.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Locate the TPM connector on the system board and then insert the TPM module into the TPM connector.  
Figure 49. Installing the TPM module  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, you can  
configure the TPM function in the Setup Utility program. See “Configuring the TPM function” on page 66.  
Removing the TPM module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the TPM module if the server has one installed.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. Use any documentation that comes with the TPM module and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
2. If you remove the TPM module, the TPM function is unavailable.  
To remove the TPM module, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
110 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the TPM connector on the system board and then remove the TPM module installed on the  
TPM connector by lifting it straight up.  
Note: Carefully handle the TPM module by its edges.  
Figure 50. Removing the TPM module  
5. If you are instructed to return the old TPM module, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing or removing the DIT module  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or remove the DIT module.  
The DIT module, which is only available in some models, provides diagnostic LEDs through the DIT panel  
to help you easily identify a problem. The diagnostic LEDs on the DIT panel also vary depending on the  
installed power supply. For more information, see “DIT module” on page 18.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the DIT module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install the DIT module.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To install the DIT module, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Remove the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIT module to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the DIT module out of the package.  
5. Connect the signal cable to the rear of the DIT module.  
6. Route the signal cable of the DIT module through the corresponding hole in the chassis and position the  
DIT module on the chassis so that the screw hole in the DIT module is aligned with the corresponding  
screw hole 1 in the chassis. Then, install the screw to secure the DIT module in place.  
Figure 51. Installing the DIT module  
7. Remove the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
112 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the DIT module connector on the system board. See  
“System board components” on page 42. Then, properly route the signal cable of the DIT module. You  
might need to secure the signal cable with cable clips or ties in the chassis.  
Figure 52. Cable routing  
9. Reinstall the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
10. Reinstall the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Removing the DIT module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove the DIT module.  
This topic applies only to server models that come with the DIT module.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustration in this topic.  
2. If you remove the DIT module, the server will lose the diagnostic LEDs on the DIT panel.  
To remove the DIT module, do the following:  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Remove the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
4. Locate the DIT module. See “DIT module” on page 18.  
5. Remove the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Disconnect the signal cable of the DIT module from the DIT module connector on the system board.  
See “System board components” on page 42.  
7. If necessary, remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your access to the signal  
cable of the DIT module. Note the cable routing and then release the signal cable of the DIT module  
from any cable clips or ties in the chassis.  
8. Remove the screw 1 on the chassis that secures the DIT module. Then, carefully remove the DIT  
module from the chassis and pull the signal cable of the DIT module out of the hole in the chassis.  
Figure 53. Removing the DIT module  
9. Disconnect the signal cable from the rear of the DIT module.  
10. Reinstall the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
11. Reinstall the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
12. If you are instructed to return the old DIT module, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
114 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing or replacing an optical drive  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or replace an optical drive.  
The EMI integrity and cooling of the server are protected by having all drive bays covered or occupied. Your  
server has two optical drive bays. If only one optical drive is installed in the lower bay, the upper bay is  
covered by a metal EMI shield on the chassis and also a plastic shield on the front bezel. When you install  
a secondary optical drive or a RDX USB drive bundle, save the removed EMI shield from the chassis and  
plastic shield from the front bezel in the event that you later remove the drive and need the shields to  
cover the drive bay.  
Attention: An unoccupied drive bay without any other protection might impact the EMI integrity and cooling  
of the server, which might result in overheating or component damage. To maintain the EMI integrity and  
cooling of the server, install a new optical drive as soon as you remove the failing one or the protective shields.  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
• Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Before you begin, consider the following optical drive installation rules:  
• The server has two optical drive bays. If the server has only one optical drive installed, make sure that the  
optical drive is installed in the lower bay (optical drive bay 1). The upper bay is for a secondary optical  
drive or a RDX USB drive bundle (server option).  
• The following table provides information about the recommended power connector and connector on  
the system board for the installed optical drive or RDX USB drive bundle. See “Server components” on  
page 25 for the locations of the optical drive bays and “System board components” on page 42 for the  
locations of the connectors on the system board.  
Drive bay  
Drive  
Power connector  
Connector on the system board  
An optical drive installed  
P11  
Optical drive bay 1 (lower  
bay)  
SATA 5 connector  
An optical drive installed in P12  
some models  
Optical drive bay 2 (upper  
bay)  
SATA 4 connector  
P6  
A RDX USB drive bundle  
(server option)  
Internal dual-port USB 2.0  
connector 2  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: For information about the RDX USB drive bundle and instructions on how to install it, refer to the  
documentation that comes with the RDX USB drive bundle. You can purchase this option directly from  
Lenovo. The option name is Lenovo Removable Disk Technology (RDX) USB Drive Bundle.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
2. Use any documentation that comes with the optical drive and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install or replace an optical drive, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Locate the optical drive bays. See “Server components” on page 25.  
4. Depending on whether you are installing or replacing an optical drive, do one of the following:  
• If you are installing a secondary optical drive in the upper optical drive bay, remove the front bezel.  
See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87. Then, remove the plastic shield for the  
bay from the front panel. Remove the screw 1 that secures the metal EMI shield covered on the  
upper optical drive bay. Insert a finger into the hole in the EMI shield and carefully pull the EMI  
shield out of the front of the chassis.  
Figure 54. Removing the EMI shield for the upper optical drive bay  
116 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you are replacing an optical drive, disconnect the signal cable and the power cable from the rear of  
the optical drive. Press the release button 1 in the direction as shown and push the optical drive  
from the rear until it is projected from the front of the chassis. Then, hold the optical drive from the  
front and completely slide it out of the chassis.  
Figure 55. Removing the optical drive  
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new optical drive to any unpainted surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, take the new optical drive and the signal cable out of the package.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Slide the new optical drive into the drive bay from the front until it snaps into position.  
Note: You do not need to remove the front bezel when replacing an optical drive. However, if you are  
adding a secondary optical drive in the upper optical drive bay, you need to remove the front bezel first  
and then gain access to the protective shields to remove them. The following illustration shows only the  
situation in which the front bezel has not been removed.  
Figure 56. Installing the optical drive  
7. Connect the appropriate power cable 1 and the signal cable 2 to the rear of the new optical drive.  
Figure 57. Connecting cables to the rear of the optical drive  
8. If necessary, connect the other end of the signal cable to the appropriate SATA connector on the system  
board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
9. Reinstall the front bezel if you have removed it. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on  
page 87.  
10. Do one of the following:  
118 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If you are installing an optical drive, save the removed EMI-protective shield from the chassis and  
plastic shield from the front bezel in the event that you later remove the drive and need the shields to  
cover the drive bay.  
• If you are replacing an optical drive and are instructed to return the old optical drive, follow all  
packaging instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation or replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install or replace a hot-swap hard disk drive.  
This topic applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drive(s) installed. See “Features” on  
page 7 for more information about the supported hot-swap hard disk drives.  
For a list of the ThinkServer hard disk drive options, go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver. Click the  
Products tab and then click Options ➙ ThinkServer Hard Drives to view the information.  
You can install or replace a hot-swap hard disk drive without turning off the server, which helps you avoid  
significant interruption to the operation of the system.  
The EMI integrity and cooling of the server are protected by having all drive bays covered or occupied. The  
number of the installed hard disk drives in your server varies depending on the server model. The vacant  
bays are either covered by an EMI-protective panel or occupied by dummy hard disk drive trays. When you  
install a hot-swap hard disk drive, save the removed dummy hard disk drive tray from the drive bay in the  
event that you later remove the hot-swap hard disk drive and need the dummy tray to cover the place.  
Attention: An unoccupied drive bay without any other protection might impact the EMI integrity and cooling  
of the server, which might result in overheating or component damage. To maintain the EMI integrity and  
cooling of the server, install a new hot-swap hard disk drive as soon as you remove the failing one or  
the dummy tray.  
Before you begin, consider the following hard disk drive installation rules:  
• Follow the order of the hard disk drive bays when installing a hard disk drive. See “Server components”  
on page 25 to locate the hard disk drive bays in your server.  
• For RAID configuration, the hard disk drives must be the same type with the same capacity if they are  
within a single RAID array. For more information, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
• For hard disk drives with different capacities, install the hard disk drive with the lowest capacity first.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. Depending on the model, your server might come with 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive(s) or 2.5-inch  
hot-swap hard disk drive(s). The illustrations in this topic are based on server models with four 3.5-inch  
hot-swap SATA or SAS hard disk drives. For other models, the replacement procedure is the same.  
2. Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Use any documentation that comes with the hot-swap hard disk drive and follow those instructions in  
addition to the instructions in this topic.  
To install or replace a hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Use the front door key to unlock the front door and then use the front door handle 1 to pivot the  
front door to the open position.  
Figure 58. Opening the front door of the server  
2. Locate the appropriate hard disk drive bay. See “Server components” on page 25.  
120 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Press the release button 1 to open the handle of the hot-swap hard disk drive or the dummy tray.  
Figure 59. Opening the handle of the hot-swap hard disk drive or the dummy tray  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Pull the handle and carefully slide the hot-swap hard disk drive or the dummy tray out of the front of  
the chassis.  
Figure 60. Removing the hot-swap hard disk drive or the dummy tray  
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new hot-swap hard disk drive to any unpainted  
surface on the outside of the server. Then, take the new hot-swap hard disk drive out of the package.  
Note: Do not touch the circuit board on the hard disk drive.  
122 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Slide the new hot-swap hard disk drive into the drive bay from the front until it snaps into position  
and then completely close the handle.  
Figure 61. Installing the hot-swap hard disk drive  
7. Check the hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs to make sure that the hard disk drive is operating  
correctly. You might have to restart the server for the newly installed drive to be recognized. See  
“Hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs” on page 32. If the hard disk drive is faulty, you need to reinstall  
or replace it until it is operating correctly.  
8. Close and lock the front door.  
9. Do one of the following:  
• If you are installing a hot-swap hard disk drive, save the removed hard disk drive dummy tray in  
the event that you later remove the hot-swap hard disk drive and need a dummy tray to cover the  
drive bay.  
• If you are replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive and are instructed to return the old hot-swap hard  
disk drive, follow all packaging instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To configure RAID, go to “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Removing or installing a non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove or install a non-hot-swap hard disk drive.  
This topic applies only to server models that have non-hot-swap hard disk drive(s) installed. See “Features”  
on page 7 for more information about the supported non-hot-swap hard disk drives.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For a list of the ThinkServer hard disk drive options, go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver. Click the  
Products tab and then click Options ➙ ThinkServer Hard Drives to view the information.  
Removing a non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to remove a non-hot-swap hard disk drive.  
Before you begin, consider the following hard disk drive installation rules:  
• Follow the order of the hard disk drive bays when installing a hard disk drive. See “Server components”  
on page 25 to locate the hard disk drive bays in your server.  
• For RAID configuration, the hard disk drives must be the same type with the same capacity if they are  
within a single RAID array. For more information, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
• For hard disk drives with different capacities, install the hard disk drive with the lowest capacity first.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To remove a non-hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
124 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Use the front door key to unlock the front door and then use the front door handle 1 to pivot the  
front door to the open position.  
Figure 62. Opening the front door of the server  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. The non-hot-swap hard disk drive(s) are installed in the lower hard disk drive cage and are protected  
by an EMI-protective panel. Press the small tab 1 on the EMI-protective panel from the bottom and  
then pivot the EMI-protective panel upward to remove it from the chassis and gain access to the  
non-hot-swap hard disk drive(s).  
2
1
CPU  
MEM  
PSU  
Figure 63. Removing the EMI-protective panel  
4. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
5. Remove the front system fan 1. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Locate the appropriate non-hot-swap hard disk drive. See “Server components” on page 25. Then,  
disconnect the SATA signal cable and the power cable from the rear of the non-hot-swap hard disk drive.  
126 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Insert two fingers into the holes in the two tabs on the front of the blue bracket. Then, press the tabs  
towards each other and carefully slide the non-hot-swap hard disk drive out of the front of the chassis.  
2
1
CPU  
MEM  
PSU  
Figure 64. Sliding the non-hot-swap hard disk drive out of the bay  
8. Flex the sides of the blue bracket to remove the non-hot-swap hard disk drive from the bracket. Save  
the bracket for future use.  
Note: Do not touch the circuit board on the hard disk drive.  
9. Reinstall the front system fan 1. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Align the top edge of the EMI-protective panel with the top side of the hard disk drive cage and then  
pivot the EMI-protective panel down until it snaps into position.  
Figure 65. Installing the EMI-protective panel  
11. Disconnect the SATA cable for the removed non-hot-swap hard disk drive from the system board and  
save the cable for future use.  
12. Close and lock the front door.  
13. If you are instructed to return the old non-hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all packaging instructions and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the removal procedure, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, you  
might need to reconfigure RAID for your server. See “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Installing a non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to install a non-hot-swap hard disk drive.  
Before you begin, consider the following hard disk drive installation rules:  
• Follow the order of the hard disk drive bays when installing a hard disk drive. See “Server components”  
on page 25 to locate the hard disk drive bays in your server.  
• For RAID configuration, the hard disk drives must be the same type with the same capacity if they are  
within a single RAID array. For more information, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
128 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• For hard disk drives with different capacities, install the hard disk drive with the lowest capacity first.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
• Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
• Use any documentation that comes with the hard disk drive and follow those instructions in addition to  
the instructions in this topic.  
To install a non-hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Use the front door key to unlock the front door and then use the front door handle 1 to pivot the  
front door to the open position.  
Figure 66. Opening the front door of the server  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. The non-hot-swap hard disk drive(s) are installed in the lower hard disk drive cage and are protected  
by an EMI-protective panel. Press the small tab 1 on the EMI-protective panel from the bottom and  
then pivot the EMI-protective panel upward to remove it from the chassis and gain access to the  
non-hot-swap hard disk drive bays.  
2
1
CPU  
MEM  
PSU  
Figure 67. Removing the EMI-protective panel  
4. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
5. Remove the front system fan 1. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Locate the appropriate non-hot-swap hard disk drive bay. See “Server components” on page 25.  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new non-hot-swap hard disk drive to any  
unpainted surface on the outside of the server. Then, take the new non-hot-swap hard disk drive and  
the signal cable out of the package.  
Note: Do not touch the circuit board on the hard disk drive.  
130 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Install the new non-hot-swap hard disk drive into a blue bracket by flexing the sides of the bracket and  
aligning pin 1 , pin 2 , pin 4 , and pin 5 on the bracket with the corresponding holes in the hard disk  
drive so that the hard disk drive can be seated in the bracket.  
Note: Do not touch the circuit board 3 on the bottom of the hard disk drive.  
Figure 68. Installing the non-hot-swap hard disk drive into the bracket  
9. Slide the new non-hot-swap hard disk drive with bracket into the drive bay until it snaps into position.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Connect the appropriate power cable 1 and the SATA signal cable 2 to the rear of the non-hot-swap  
hard disk drive.  
Figure 69. Connecting cables to the rear of the non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
The following table provides information about the recommended power connector and system  
board SATA connector for the non-hot-swap hard disk drive installed in each drive bay. See “Server  
components” on page 25 and “System board components” on page 42 for the location information  
about the hard disk drive bays and SATA connectors on the system board.  
Non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
Installed in bay 0  
Power connector  
P9 power connector  
System board SATA connector  
SATA connector 0  
Installed in bay 1  
P10 power connector  
P7 power connector  
P8 power connector  
SATA connector 1  
Installed in bay 2  
SATA connector 2  
Installed in bay 3  
SATA connector 3  
11. Connect the other end of the SATA signal cable to the appropriate SATA connector on the system board.  
See “System board components” on page 42.  
12. Reinstall the front system fan 1. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
132 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. Align the top edge of the EMI-protective panel with the top side of the hard disk drive cage and then  
pivot the EMI-protective panel down until it snaps into position.  
Figure 70. Installing the EMI-protective panel  
14. Close and lock the front door.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the installation, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. Then, you might  
need to reconfigure RAID for your server. See “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
Replacing the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane.  
This topic applies only to server models that have hot-swap hard disk drive(s) installed.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Remove the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
4. Locate the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane(s). See “Hot-swap hard disk drive backplane” on  
page 34.  
5. Remove the front system fan. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Remove all the installed hot-swap hard disk drives and dummy trays (if any) from the hard disk drive  
cage. See “Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 119.  
7. Note down the cable connections on the backplane and then disconnect all the cables from the  
backplane.  
8. Lift the release latch 1 and slide the hard disk drive cage out of the front of the chassis.  
Note: The following illustration shows the 3.5-inch hard disk drive cage. For the 2.5-inch hard disk  
drive cage, the removal procedure is the same.  
Figure 71. Removing the hard disk drive cage  
9. Depending on whether your server has a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive cage with backplane or  
3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive cage(s) with backplane(s), do one of the following:  
134 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• For the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, remove the four screws that secure the  
backplane and then remove the backplane from the hard disk drive cage.  
Figure 72. Removing the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
• For the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, remove the six screws that secure the  
backplane and then remove the backplane from the hard disk drive cage.  
Figure 73. Removing the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
10. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new hot-swap hard disk drive backplane to any  
unpainted surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the new backplane from the package.  
Note: Carefully handle the backplane by its edges.  
11. Position the new backplane on the hard disk drive cage so that the screw holes in the new backplane  
are aligned with the corresponding holes in the hard disk drive cage. Then, do one of the following  
depending on the hard disk drive cage:  
• For the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive cage, install the four screws to secure the backplane on  
the cage.  
Figure 74. Installing the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• For the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive cage, install the six screws to secure the backplane on  
the cage.  
Figure 75. Installing the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
12. Slide the hard disk drive cage into the chassis from the front until it snaps into position.  
Note: The following illustration shows the 3.5-inch hard disk drive cage. For the 2.5-inch hard disk  
drive cage, the installation procedure is the same.  
Figure 76. Installing the hard disk drive cage  
13. Reinstall all the hot-swap hard disk drives and dummy trays (if any) in the hard disk drive cage. See  
“Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive” on page 119.  
14. Refer to your note and reconnect the cables to the backplane.  
15. Reinstall the front system fan. See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
16. Reinstall the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
136 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. If you are instructed to return the old hot-swap hard disk drive backplane, follow all packaging  
instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing the non-hot-swap power supply assembly  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the non-hot-swap power supply assembly.  
This topic applies only to server models that come with a non-hot-swap power supply assembly.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the non-hot-swap power supply assembly, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Remove the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Note down the cable routing and connection. Then, disconnect the power supply assembly cables from  
the system board and all drives. For server models with hot-swap hard disk drives, you also need to  
disconnect the power cable(s) from the hot-swap hard disk drive backplane(s).  
6. Release the power supply assembly cables from the cable clips and ties in the chassis.  
7. Remove the four screws 1 at the rear of the chassis that secure the power supply assembly. Then,  
push the power supply assembly from the rear until it is released from the metal retaining tab 2 .  
CUP  
EM  
Figure 77. Releasing the non-hot-swap power supply assembly  
138 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Pivot the power supply assembly a little bit in the direction as shown and then lift it out of the chassis.  
CUP  
EM  
Figure 78. Removing the non-hot-swap power supply assembly  
9. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new power supply assembly to any unpainted  
surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the new power supply assembly from the package  
and ensure that the new power supply assembly is the correct replacement. See “Features” on page  
7 for information about the supported power supply assemblies.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Install the new power supply assembly into the chassis so that the four screw holes in the new power  
supply assembly are aligned with the corresponding holes marked with A in the rear of the chassis.  
Then, install the four screws 1 to secure the new power supply assembly in place.  
Note: Use only screws provided by Lenovo.  
CUP  
EM  
Figure 79. Installing the non-hot-swap power supply assembly  
11. Refer to your note and connect the new power supply assembly cables to the system board, all drives,  
and or hot-swap hard disk drive backplane(s), depending on the model. Then, properly route the cables  
and secure the cables with the cable clips and ties in the chassis.  
12. Reinstall the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
13. If you are instructed to return the old non-hot-swap power supply assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing a hot-swap redundant power supply module  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
140 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This topic provides instructions on how to replace a hot-swap redundant power supply module.  
This topic applies only to server models that come with hot-swap redundant power supply module(s). For  
each hot-swap redundant power supply module, there might be one or two status LEDs on the power  
supply module near the power cord connector. When the green LED is lit, it indicates that the hot-swap  
redundant power supply module is working properly. When the red LED is lit, it indicates that the hot-swap  
redundant power supply module has failed.  
The hot-swap redundant power supply modules help you avoid significant interruption to the operation of  
the system when a power supply module fails and you can replace a hot-swap redundant power supply  
module without turning off the server.  
Note: To maintain the EMI integrity and cooling of the server, install a new hot-swap redundant power  
supply module as soon as you remove the failing one or cover the other bay with a shield if you just use  
one module to provide power.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Notes:  
1. Your hot-swap redundant power supply module might look slightly different from the illustrations in  
this topic.  
2. Use any documentation that comes with the new hot-swap redundant power supply module and follow  
those instructions in addition to the instructions in this topic.  
To replace a hot-swap redundant power supply module, do the following:  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Locate the failing hot-swap redundant power supply module on the rear of your server. Then, press the  
release tab 1 in the direction as shown and carefully pull the handle 2 at the same time to slide the  
redundant power supply module out of the chassis.  
Note: Do not use too much strength. You can first carefully slide the redundant power supply module a  
little bit out to release it from the secured position. Then, completely slide it out of the chassis.  
Figure 80. Removing a hot-swap redundant power supply module  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new hot-swap redundant power supply module  
to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the new hot-swap redundant  
power supply module from the package.  
142 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Note the orientation of the hot-swap redundant power supply module and then slide the new hot-swap  
redundant power supply module into the chassis until it snaps into position.  
Note: If your server comes with one hot-swap redundant power supply module installed in the  
redundant power supply module bay 1 (the bay number is marked on the rear of the chassis) and you  
are installing a secondary hot-swap redundant power supply module to provide redundant power, you  
need to remove the shield that protects the bay 2 first. Save the shield for future use.  
Figure 81. Installing a hot-swap redundant power supply module  
4. If you are instructed to return the old hot-swap redundant power supply module, follow all packaging  
instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
5. To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
Replacing the power distribution board and cage assembly  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the power distribution board and cage assembly.  
This topic applies only to server models that come with hot-swap redundant power supply modules.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the power distribution board and cage assembly, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the hot-swap redundant power supply module(s). See “Replacing a hot-swap redundant  
power supply module” on page 140.  
Note: If your server comes with one hot-swap redundant power supply module installed in the  
redundant power supply module bay 1 (the bay number is marked on the rear of the chassis), there is a  
shied installed on bay 2 to protect the empty bay. Remove the shield and save it for future use.  
3. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
4. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
5. Remove the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Note down the cable routing and connection. Then, disconnect the power cables of the power  
distribution board and cage assembly from the system board and all drives. For server models with  
hot-swap hard disk drives, you also need to disconnect the power cable(s) from the hot-swap hard  
disk drive backplane(s).  
7. Release the power cables of the power distribution board and cage assembly from the cable clips  
and ties in the chassis.  
144 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Remove the four screws 1 at the rear of the chassis and the two screws 2 on the metal clip at the  
front of the power distribution board and cage assembly. Then, push the power distribution board and  
cage assembly from the rear until it is released from the metal retaining tab 3 and then carefully lift  
it out of the chassis.  
Figure 82. Removing the power distribution board and cage assembly  
9. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new power distribution board and cage assembly  
to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the new power distribution board  
and cage assembly from the package.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Install the new power distribution board and cage assembly into the chassis so that the four screw holes  
1 in the rear of the new power distribution board and cage assembly are aligned with the corresponding  
holes marked with R in the rear of the chassis. Meanwhile, make sure that the two screw holes 2 in  
the metal clip at the front of the new power distribution board and cage assembly are aligned with the  
corresponding holes in the chassis. Then, install the four screws 1 and the two screws 2 to secure the  
new power distribution board and cage assembly in place.  
Note: Use only screws provided by Lenovo.  
Figure 83. Installing the power distribution board and cage assembly  
11. Refer to your note and connect the power cables of the new power distribution board and cage assembly  
to the system board, all drives, and or hot-swap hard disk drive backplane(s), depending on the model.  
Then, properly route the cables and secure the cables with the cable clips and ties in the chassis.  
12. Reinstall the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
13. Reinstall the hot-swap redundant power supply module(s) and or the protective shield for the redundant  
power supply module bay 2. See “Replacing a hot-swap redundant power supply module” on page 140.  
14. If you are instructed to return the old power distribution board and cage assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
146 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the front panel board assembly  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the front panel board assembly.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the front panel board assembly, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Remove the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
4. Locate the front panel. See “Front panel” on page 17.  
5. Remove the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
6. Disconnect the signal cables of the front panel board assembly from the internal dual-port USB 2.0  
connector 1 and the front panel connector on the system board. See “System board components”  
on page 42.  
7. If necessary, remove any parts or disconnect any cables that might impede your access to the signal  
cables of the front panel board assembly. Note down the cable routing and then release the signal  
cables of the front panel board assembly from any cable clips or ties in the chassis.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Remove the screw 1 on the chassis that secures the front panel board assembly. Then, carefully  
remove the front panel board assembly from the chassis and pull the signal cables of the front panel  
board assembly out of the chassis.  
Figure 84. Removing the front panel board assembly  
9. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new front panel board assembly to any unpainted  
surface on the outside of the server. Then, take the new front panel board assembly out of the package.  
10. Note the cable connection. Then, disconnect the signal cables from the rear of the old front panel board  
assembly and connect them to the rear of the new one.  
148 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Route the signal cables of the new front panel board assembly through the corresponding hole in the  
chassis and position the new front panel board assembly on the chassis so that the screw hole in it  
is aligned with the corresponding screw hole 1 in the chassis. Then, install the screw to secure the  
front panel board assembly in place.  
Figure 85. Installing the front panel board assembly  
12. Connect the front panel USB cable to the internal dual-port USB 2.0 connector 1 on the system board.  
Then, connect the front panel cable to the front panel connector on the system board. See “System  
board components” on page 42.  
13. Properly route the signal cables of the new front panel board assembly according to your note. You  
might need to secure the signal cables with cable clips or ties in the chassis.  
14. Reinstall the front system fan(s). See “Replacing the front system fan” on page 149.  
15. Reinstall the front bezel. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on page 87.  
16. If you are instructed to return the old front panel board assembly, follow all packaging instructions and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing the front system fan  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the front system fan.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Depending on the model, your server might come with one or two front system fans. See “Server  
components” on page 25 to locate the front system fan(s) installed in your server model.  
Note: The front system fan 2 is only available in server models with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk  
drives installed. The front system fan 2 should only be factory-installed. Lenovo does not support users  
and servicers to install a secondary front system fan by themselves.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the front system fan, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Locate the front system fan 1. See “Server components” on page 25.  
4. Disconnect the front system fan 1 cable from the 4-pin system fan 1 connector on the system board.  
See “System board components” on page 42.  
150 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Press the two tabs of the front system fan towards each other until the two tips 1 are aligned with the  
corresponding holes in the chassis. Then, carefully slide the front system fan out of the chassis.  
Figure 86. Removing the front system fan  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new front system fan to any unpainted surface on  
the outside of the server. Then, remove the new front system fan from the package.  
7. Position the new front system fan on the system fan 1 mounting area of the chassis so that the three tips  
1 on the bottom of the front system fan are aligned with the corresponding holes in the mounting area.  
Meanwhile, make sure that the two posts 2 of the front system fan are aligned with the corresponding  
holes in the inner side of the chassis. Then, carefully slide the front system fan into the chassis until  
it snaps into position.  
Figure 87. Installing the front system fan  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Connect the new front system fan cable to the 4-pin system fan 1 connector on the system board.  
See “System board components” on page 42.  
Note: For server models with five to eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives, there is a secondary front  
system fan installed in the front system fan 2 mounting area (above the front system fan 1 mounting  
area). The cable of the secondary front system fan is connected to the 5-pin system fan 2 connector on  
the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
9. If you are instructed to return the old front system fan, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing the rear system fan  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the rear system fan.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To replace the rear system fan, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Locate the rear system fan. See “Server components” on page 25.  
4. Disconnect the rear system fan cable from the system fan 3 connector on the system board. See  
“System board components” on page 42.  
152 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. The rear system fan is attached to the chassis by four rubber mounts. Remove the rear system fan by  
cutting the rubber mounts and pulling the rear system fan out of the chassis.  
Figure 88. Removing the rear system fan  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new rear system fan to any unpainted surface on  
the outside of the server. Then, remove the new rear system fan from the package.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Position the new rear system fan, which has four new rubber mounts attached, on the chassis so that  
the four new rubber mounts are aligned with the corresponding holes in the chassis. Push the rubber  
mounts through the holes and then pull on the tips of the rubber mounts from the other side of the  
chassis until the rear system fan is secured in place.  
Figure 89. Installing the rear system fan  
8. Connect the new rear system fan cable to the system fan 3 connector on the system board. See  
“System board components” on page 42.  
9. If you are instructed to return the old rear system fan, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing the heat sink and fan assembly  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the heat sink and fan assembly.  
154 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
CAUTION:  
The heat sink and fan assembly might be very hot. Turn off the server and wait three to five minutes to  
let the server cool before removing the server cover.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
To replace the heat sink and fan assembly, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Locate the heat sink and fan assembly. See “Server components” on page 25.  
4. Lay the server on its side for easier operation. If necessary, remove any installed PCI card that might  
impede your access to the heat sink and fan assembly. See “Removing a PCI card” on page 95.  
5. Disconnect the heat sink and fan assembly cable from the microprocessor fan connector on the system  
board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Remove the four screws that secure the heat sink and fan assembly to the system board. It is  
recommended that you carefully remove the four screws from the system board using the following  
method to avoid any possible damage to the system board.  
a. Partially remove screw 1 , then completely remove screw 3 , and then return to screw 1 and  
completely remove it.  
b. Partially remove screw 2 , then completely remove screw 4 , and then return to screw 2 and  
completely remove it.  
Note: The four screws are integrated parts of the heat sink and fan assembly. Do not try to remove the  
four screws from the heat sink and fan assembly.  
Figure 90. Removing the screws that secure the heat sink and fan assembly  
7. Gently twist the heat sink and fan assembly to free it from the microprocessor and then lift the heat sink  
and fan assembly off the system board.  
8. Lay aside the old heat sink and fan assembly. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new  
heat sink and fan assembly to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the new  
heat sink and fan assembly from the package.  
Note: When handling the heat sink and fan assembly, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of  
it.  
9. Place the new heat sink and fan assembly on the system board so that the four screws on the new heat  
sink and fan assembly are aligned with the corresponding mounting studs on the system board. Note  
the orientation of the new heat sink and fan assembly and make sure that you properly place it so that  
you can easily connect the heat sink and fan assembly cable to the microprocessor fan connector on  
the system board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
156 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Install the four screws to secure the new heat sink and fan assembly on the system board. It is  
recommended that you carefully install the four screws using the following method to avoid any possible  
damage to the system board.  
a. Partially tighten screw 1 , then firmly tighten screw 3 , and then return to screw 1 and firmly tighten  
it. Do not over-tighten the screws.  
b. Partially tighten screw 2 , then firmly tighten screw 4 , and then return to screw 2 and firmly tighten  
it. Do not over-tighten the screws.  
Figure 91. Installing the screws to secure the heat sink and fan assembly  
11. Connect the heat sink and fan assembly cable to the microprocessor fan connector on the system  
board. See “System board components” on page 42.  
Note: If the heat sink and fan assembly cable is too long, loosely knot the cable for proper cable routing.  
12. If you are instructed to return the old heat sink and fan assembly, follow all packaging instructions and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Replacing the microprocessor  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the microprocessor.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
The heat sink and fan assembly and the microprocessor might be very hot. Turn off the server and  
wait three to five minutes to let the server cool before removing the server cover.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
To replace the microprocessor, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Remove the heat sink and fan assembly. See “Replacing the heat sink and fan assembly” on page 154.  
5. Gently press down the small handle on the microprocessor socket and then pull the handle a little bit  
outward to release it from the secured position. Then, pivot the handle upward until the handle and the  
microprocessor retainer are in the fully open position.  
Note: Your microprocessor and socket might look different from the one illustrated.  
Figure 92. Lifting the handle to open the microprocessor retainer  
158 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Touch only the edges of the microprocessor and carefully lift it straight up and out of the microprocessor  
socket. Place the old microprocessor on a static-protective surface.  
Note: Do not touch the gold contacts on the bottom of the microprocessor.  
Figure 93. Removing the microprocessor  
7. Make sure that the small handle and the microprocessor retainer are in the fully open position.  
Note: Do not drop anything onto the microprocessor socket while it is exposed. The socket pins must  
be kept as clean as possible.  
8. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new microprocessor to any unpainted surface on  
the outside of the server. Then, remove the new microprocessor from the package.  
9. Remove the new microprocessor from the protective cover that protects the gold contacts on the  
bottom of the new microprocessor.  
Note: Do not touch the pins on the microprocessor socket and the gold contacts on the bottom of the  
new microprocessor.  
Figure 94. Do not touch the pins  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Hold the new microprocessor by its edges and align the notches 1 on the new microprocessor with the  
tabs 2 in the microprocessor socket. Then, carefully lower the new microprocessor straight down into  
the microprocessor socket.  
Note: The small triangle 3 on one corner of the new microprocessor is the microprocessor orientation  
indicator. The new microprocessor is in the correct orientation when this indicator faces toward the  
beveled corner 4 of the microprocessor socket.  
Figure 95. Installing the microprocessor  
11. Close the microprocessor retainer. Gently press down the small handle and then push the handle inward  
to lock the retainer into position and secure the new microprocessor in the socket.  
Figure 96. Securing the microprocessor in the socket  
12. Reinstall the heat sink and fan assembly. See “Replacing the heat sink and fan assembly” on page 154.  
13. If you are instructed to return the old microprocessor, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
160 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the system board battery  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the system board battery.  
Your server has a special type of memory that maintains the date, time, and configuration information for  
built-in features. The system board battery keeps the information active when you turn off the server. The  
system board battery normally requires no charging or maintenance throughout its life; however, no battery  
lasts forever. If the system board battery fails, the date, time, and configuration information, including  
passwords, are lost and an error message is displayed when you turn on the server.  
DANGER  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
When replacing the lithium coin cell battery, use only the same or an equivalent type that is  
recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
• Throw or immerse into water  
• Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
• Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A.  
California Perchlorate Information:  
Products containing CR (manganese dioxide) lithium coin cell batteries may contain perchlorate.  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See  
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
To replace the system board battery, do the following:  
Note: After you replace the system board battery, you must reset passwords, reset system date and time,  
and reconfigure the server.  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Locate the system board battery. See “Server components” on page 25.  
5. Remove any installed PCI card that impedes your access to the system board battery. See “Removing a  
PCI card” on page 95.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Remove the old system board battery.  
Figure 97. Removing the system board battery  
7. Install a new system board battery.  
Figure 98. Installing the system board battery  
8. Reinstall the PCI card that has been removed. See “Installing a PCI card” on page 93.  
9. Dispose of the old system board battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168. After you replace  
the system board battery, you must reset passwords, reset system date and time, and reconfigure the  
server. See Chapter 5 “Configuring the server” on page 55.  
Replacing the system board  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to replace the system board.  
CAUTION:  
Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away.  
162 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
The heat sink and microprocessor might be very hot. Turn off the server and wait three to five minutes  
to let the server cool before removing the server cover.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
To replace the system board, do the following:  
1. Remove all media from the drives and turn off all attached devices and the server. Then, disconnect all  
power cords from electrical outlets and disconnect all cables that are connected to the server.  
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server cover” on page 85.  
3. Lay the server on its side for easier operation.  
4. Note down the component locations, cable connections, and cable routing in the server.  
5. Remove all memory modules and PCI cards (including the RAID card and Ethernet card) that are currently  
installed. See “Removing a memory module” on page 92 and “Removing a PCI card” on page 95.  
6. Remove the heat sink and fan assembly. See “Replacing the heat sink and fan assembly” on page 154.  
7. Remove the TPM module if one is installed. See “Removing the TPM module” on page 110.  
8. Remove the ThinkServer SATA Software RAID 5 key if one is installed. See “Removing the system  
board RAID 5 key” on page 104.  
9. Remove the ThinkServer iKVM Remote Management Module if one is installed. See “Removing the  
iKVM key” on page 107.  
10. Remove the system board battery. See “Replacing the system board battery” on page 161.  
11. Remove any other parts and disconnect all cables from the system board.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. Remove the eight screws that secure the system board following the recommended numerical sequence  
as shown. Then, carefully remove the system board out of the chassis.  
Figure 99. Removing the screws that secure the system board  
13. Place both the old system board and the new system board on a clean, flat, and ESD-safe surface.  
164 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. For the new system board, gently press down the small handle on the microprocessor socket and  
then pull the handle a little bit outward to release it from the secured position. Then, pivot the handle  
upward until the handle and the microprocessor retainer are in the fully open position. Remove the  
microprocessor socket cover from the new system board.  
Notes:  
a. Your microprocessor socket and cover might look slightly different from the illustration.  
b. Do not drop anything onto the microprocessor socket while it is exposed. The socket pins must be  
kept as clean as possible.  
Figure 100. Removing the microprocessor socket cover  
15. Remove the microprocessor from the old system board and install it directly on the new system board.  
See “Replacing the microprocessor” on page 157.  
16. The old system board must be returned with a microprocessor socket cover to protect the pins on the  
socket during shipping and handling. Use the microprocessor socket cover removed from the new  
system board. To install it on the old system board, do the following:  
a. Make sure that the small handle and the microprocessor retainer are in the fully open position.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Hold the microprocessor socket cover and align the notches 1 on the socket cover with the tabs 2  
in the microprocessor socket. Then, carefully lower the socket cover straight down into the socket.  
Notes:  
1) Your microprocessor socket and cover might look slightly different from the illustration.  
2) The small triangle 3 on one corner of the microprocessor socket cover is the orientation  
indicator. The microprocessor socket cover is in the correct orientation when this indicator faces  
toward the beveled corner 4 of the microprocessor socket.  
Figure 101. Installing the microprocessor socket cover  
c. Make sure that the microprocessor socket cover is properly seated and then gently press it down  
until it is securely seated in the socket.  
Figure 102. Seating the microprocessor socket cover in the socket  
166 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d. Close the microprocessor retainer. Gently press down the small handle and then push the handle  
inward to lock the retainer into position and secure the microprocessor socket cover in the socket.  
Figure 103. Securing the microprocessor socket cover  
17. Note the orientation of the new system board and carefully place it into the chassis so that the rear  
connectors are inserted into the corresponding holes in the rear panel and the eight screw holes in the  
new system board are aligned with those in the chassis. Then, install the eight screws following the  
numerical sequence as shown to secure the new system board in the chassis.  
Figure 104. Installing the screws to secure the system board  
18. Install all parts and connect all cables that you removed from the old system board to the new system  
board. Refer to the information that you have noted down and the related topics in “Installing, removing,  
or replacing hardware” on page 89.  
19. If you are instructed to return the old system board, follow all packaging instructions and use any  
packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What to do next:  
• To work with another piece of hardware, go to the appropriate section.  
• To complete the replacement, go to “Completing the parts replacement” on page 168.  
Completing the parts replacement  
This topic provides instructions to help you complete the parts replacement and turn on your server.  
To complete the parts replacement, you must properly route the cables inside the server, reinstall the server  
cover, reconnect all the external cables and, for some devices, update the firmware and run the Setup Utility  
program to do further setup.  
Reinstalling the server cover and reconnecting cables  
Attention: Do not open your server or attempt any repair before reading and understanding the “Safety information”  
on page iii and “Guidelines” on page 83.  
This topic provides instructions on how to reinstall the server cover and reconnect cables to your server.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, reinstall the server cover before turning on the server. Operating  
the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with the server cover removed might  
damage server components.  
Before you begin, print all the related instructions or ensure that you can view the PDF version on another  
computer for reference.  
Note: Depending on the model, your server might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic.  
To reinstall the server cover and reconnect cables to your server, do the following:  
1. Make sure that all components have been reassembled correctly and that no tools or loose screws are  
left inside your server.  
2. Make sure that all internal cables are routed correctly and secured by any cable clips or ties in the  
server. Keep cables clear of the hinges and sides of the server chassis to avoid interference with  
reinstalling the server cover.  
3. If you have removed the front bezel, reinstall it. See “Removing and reinstalling the front bezel” on  
page 87.  
168 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Position the server cover on the chassis so that the rail on the bottom of the server cover engages the  
bottom rail on the chassis. Then, align the four tabs 1 on the server cover with the corresponding holes  
in the top edge of the chassis. Pivot the server cover to close it.  
Figure 105. Closing the server cover  
5. Slide the server cover to the front of the chassis until it snaps into position.  
Figure 106. Installing the server cover  
6. Tighten the thumbscrew on the server cover to secure the server cover in place.  
Chapter 6. Installing, removing, or replacing hardware 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: For safety consideration, be sure to use a tool, for example a screwdriver, to tighten the  
thumbscrew and always make sure that the thumbscrew is securely installed. Also, do not over-tighten  
the thumbscrew.  
7. Lock the server cover and server front door to ensure the security. See “Server locks” on page 22.  
8. Reconnect external cables and power cord(s) to the server. See “Rear view of the server” on page 19 to  
identify the connectors on the rear panel of the server.  
Attention: To avoid component damage, connect the power cord(s) last.  
Note: In most areas of the world, Lenovo requires the return of the defective CRU. Information about this will  
come with the CRU or will come a few days after the CRU arrives.  
Updating the server configuration  
When you turn on the server for the first time after you install, remove, or replace a device, you might  
need to update the server configuration.  
Some optional devices have device drivers that you must install. For information about installing device  
drivers, use the documentation that comes with each optional device. To obtain the supported device drivers  
for your server from the Lenovo Support Web site, go to http://support.lenovo.com. Click Download Drivers  
& Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to find the device drivers you want to download.  
Refer to the following information resources to update the server configuration:  
• To update the BIOS configuration, see “Using the Setup Utility program” on page 55.  
• To update the RAID configuration, see “Configuring RAID” on page 71.  
• To use the ThinkServer EasyStartup program, see “Using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on  
page 69.  
• To update your system firmware, see “Updating the firmware” on page 80.  
170 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting and diagnostics  
This chapter provides information about basic troubleshooting and diagnostic methods to help you solve  
problems that might occur in the server.  
If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this chapter, see Chapter 9  
“Getting information, help, and service” on page 213 for additional troubleshooting resources.  
Troubleshooting procedure  
Use the following information as a general procedure for diagnosing and troubleshooting problems you  
experience with your server:  
1. Verify that the power cords and the cables for all attached devices are connected correctly and securely.  
2. Verify that the server and all attached devices that require ac power are connected to properly grounded,  
functioning electrical outlets.  
3. Verify that all installed hardware and attached devices are enabled in the BIOS settings of your server.  
For more information about accessing and changing the BIOS settings, see “Using the Setup Utility  
program” on page 55.  
4. View the status and diagnostic LEDs to identify the system and device status and diagnose problems.  
See “Viewing the status and diagnostic LEDs” on page 171.  
5. If the server is not working after you have added new software, installed a new optional device, or  
replaced a piece of hardware, remove or reinstall the software or device to see if the problem could  
be solved.  
6. View the SEL to diagnose problems. See “Viewing the system event log” on page 172.  
7. Turn on the server and press Esc as soon as you see the logo screen to view any diagnostic messages.  
8. Download and use the PC-Doctor for DOS diagnostic program to diagnose problems. See “Using  
the diagnostic program” on page 172.  
9. Refer to “Basic troubleshooting tables” on page 172 and follow the instructions for the type of problem  
you are experiencing. If the basic troubleshooting information does not help you resolve a problem,  
continue with the next step.  
10. Try using a previously server configuration to see if a recent change to hardware or software settings has  
caused a problem. Before restoring your previous configuration, capture your current configuration in  
case the older configuration settings do not solve the problem or have adverse effect.  
11. Use an antivirus program to see if your server has been infected by a virus. If the program detects a  
virus, remove the virus.  
12. If none of these actions solve the problem, seek technical assistance. See Chapter 9 “Getting  
information, help, and service” on page 213.  
Viewing the status and diagnostic LEDs  
Your server has status and diagnostic LEDs on the front panel, the DIT panel (varies by model), the rear  
panel (Ethernet status LEDs), the system board, the hot-swap hard disk drives (if supported), and the optical  
drive(s). The various LEDs help you easily identify the system and device status and diagnose problems. For  
information about the LEDs, refer to the related topics in “Locations” on page 13.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using the diagnostic program  
The PC-Doctor for DOS diagnostic program runs independently of the operating system. Use this diagnostic  
program to test and gather information about your system in order to ensure your system is working correctly  
and resolve any hardware issues. You can run the diagnostic program from a diagnostic disc that you created.  
To use the diagnostic program, do the following:  
Note: Lenovo maintains the Support Web site by making changes and improvements periodically. The  
actual procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this topic.  
1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
2. Click Download Drivers & Software and follow the instructions on the Web page to locate the  
diagnostic program.  
3. Download the ISO image for the diagnostic program and the readme file in TXT.  
4. Use any disc burning software to create a bootable disc with the ISO image.  
5. Print the readme file that contains the instructions on how to use the diagnostic program and follow  
the instructions to start the program from the disc. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to  
start the diagnostic test.  
6. Remove the diagnostic disc from the optical drive when you complete the diagnostic process.  
Viewing the system event log  
The system event log (SEL) contains information about all the POST and system management interrupt (SMI)  
events. You can view the SEL to diagnose system problems.  
The BMC implements the SEL as specified in the IPMI 2.0 specification. The SEL is accessible regardless of  
the system power state through the BMC in-band and out-of-band interfaces.  
For more information about viewing the SEL, refer to the Remote Management Module User Guide on the  
documentation DVD that comes with your server.  
Basic troubleshooting tables  
Use the basic troubleshooting information to find solutions to problems that have definite symptoms.  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program problems  
Follow the suggested actions for the corresponding symptom in the order in which they are listed until the  
problem is solved. If none of these actions solve the problem, see “Troubleshooting procedure” on page  
171 for the subsequent steps you should check after using the information in this topic. If the problem  
cannot be solved by yourself, seek technical assistance. See Chapter 9 “Getting information, help, and  
service” on page 213.  
Note: If you are instructed to remove, install, or replace any CRUs, refer to the related procedure in Chapter  
6 “Installing, removing, or replacing hardware” on page 83.  
172 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Action  
Symptom  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD does not start.  
1. Make sure that the server supports the ThinkServer  
EasyStartup program and has a bootable DVD drive.  
2. Make sure that you have set the optical drive with  
the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD as the first startup  
device.  
3. Verify if the optical drive or the disc has problems.  
See “Optical drive problems” on page 173.  
The operating system installation program continuously  
loops.  
Make more space available on the hard disk drive.  
1. Make sure that the operating system media is  
supported by the ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
version your are using. For a list of the supported  
operating systems, refer to the user guide and  
compatibility notes for the ThinkServer EasyStartup  
program through the program main interface. See  
“Starting the ThinkServer EasyStartup program” on  
page 70.  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program cannot start the  
operating system media.  
2. Verify if the optical drive or the disc has problems.  
See “Optical drive problems” on page 173.  
Optical drive problems  
Follow the suggested actions for the corresponding symptom in the order in which they are listed until the  
problem is solved. If none of these actions solve the problem, see “Troubleshooting procedure” on page  
171 for the subsequent steps you should check after using the information in this topic. If the problem  
cannot be solved by yourself, seek technical assistance. See Chapter 9 “Getting information, help, and  
service” on page 213.  
Notes:  
1. If you are instructed to remove, install, or replace any CRUs, refer to the related procedure in Chapter 6  
“Installing, removing, or replacing hardware” on page 83.  
2. If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” this action step is reserved for a  
trained service technician and must be performed only by a trained service technician.  
Action  
Symptom  
The optical drive is not recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The signal cable and connector are not damaged  
and the connector pins are not bent.  
• The optical drive is securely connected to the  
correct SATA connector on the system board and  
the SATA connector is enabled in the Setup Utility  
program. See “Using the Setup Utility program”  
on page 55.  
• All cables and jumpers (if any) are installed  
correctly.  
• The correct device driver is installed for the optical  
drive.  
2. Run any optical drive diagnostic programs if you  
have.  
3. Reinstall the optical drive and reconnect cables.  
4. Replace the signal cable for the optical drive.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting and diagnostics 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Action  
5. Replace the optical drive.  
Symptom  
6. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
A disc is not working correctly.  
1. Make sure that the disc is in the optical drive with the  
shiny side facing down.  
2. Make sure that the disc surface is clean and not  
scratched.  
3. Check the disc or package for regional coding. You  
might need to purchase a disc with coding for the  
region where you are using the product.  
4. Restart the disc player program.  
5. Restart the server.  
6. Run any optical drive diagnostic programs if you  
have.  
7. Reinstall the optical drive and reconnect cables.  
8. Replace the signal cable for the optical drive.  
9. Replace the optical drive.  
Hard disk drive problems  
Follow the suggested actions for the corresponding symptom in the order in which they are listed until the  
problem is solved. If none of these actions solve the problem, see “Troubleshooting procedure” on page  
171 for the subsequent steps you should check after using the information in this topic. If the problem  
cannot be solved by yourself, seek technical assistance. See Chapter 9 “Getting information, help, and  
service” on page 213.  
Notes:  
1. If you are instructed to remove, install, or replace any CRUs, refer to the related procedure in Chapter 6  
“Installing, removing, or replacing hardware” on page 83.  
2. If the server model comes with hot-swap hard disk drives, the status LEDs on each hot-swap hard disk  
drive help you easily identify a problem. See “Hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs” on page 32.  
Action  
Symptom  
A newly installed non-hot-swap hard disk drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The signal cable and connector are not damaged.  
• The non-hot-swap hard disk drive is securely  
connected to the correct SATA connector on the  
system board and the SATA connector is enabled  
in the Setup Utility program. See “Using the Setup  
Utility program” on page 55.  
• All cables and jumpers (if any) are installed  
correctly.  
2. Run any diagnostic programs to test the hard disk  
drive.  
3. Reinstall the non-hot-swap hard disk drive and  
reconnect cables.  
4. Replace the signal cable for the non-hot-swap hard  
disk drive.  
174 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Action  
Symptom  
5. Replace the non-hot-swap hard disk drive.  
A newly installed hot-swap hard disk drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that the drive is installed into the correct  
drive bay.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. Remove the drive from the bay, wait 45 seconds,  
and reinsert the drive into the bay, making sure that  
the drive connects to the hot-swap hard disk drive  
backplane.  
4. Run any diagnostic programs to test the hard disk  
drive.  
5. Make sure that the hot-swap hard disk drive  
backplane is correctly seated. When it is correctly  
seated, the drive assemblies correctly connect to the  
backplane without bowing or causing movement of  
the backplane.  
6. Make sure that the cable connection is correct. See  
“Connecting cables” on page 38.  
7. Reconnect the backplane power cable and repeat  
step 1 through step 4.  
8. Reconnect the backplane signal cable and repeat  
step 1 through step 4.  
9. If you suspect a problem with the backplane signal  
cable or the backplane:  
a. Replace the affected backplane signal cable.  
b. Replace the affected backplane.  
Multiple hard disk drives fail.  
1. Run any diagnostic programs to test the hard disk  
drives.  
2. Make sure that the cable connection is correct. See  
“Connecting cables” on page 38.  
3. Reconnect the power cable.  
4. Reconnect the signal cable.  
5. Replace the affected signal cable.  
6. For hot-swap hard disk drives, if you suspect a  
problem with the backplane, replace the affected  
backplane.  
Not all drives are recognized by the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test.  
Remove the drive(s) that are not recognized by the  
diagnostic test. Then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic  
test again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace  
the drive(s) that you removed.  
The server stops responding during the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test.  
Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when  
the server stopped responding and run the diagnostic  
test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test runs  
successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a  
new one.  
A hard disk drive was not detected while the operating  
system was being started.  
Reinstall all hard disk drives and reconnect cables. Then,  
run the hard disk drive diagnostic test.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting and diagnostics 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory module problems  
Follow the suggested actions for the corresponding symptom in the order in which they are listed until the  
problem is solved. If none of these actions solve the problem, see “Troubleshooting procedure” on page  
171 for the subsequent steps you should check after using the information in this topic. If the problem  
cannot be solved by yourself, seek technical assistance. See Chapter 9 “Getting information, help, and  
service” on page 213.  
Notes:  
1. If you are instructed to remove, install, or replace any CRUs, refer to the related procedure in Chapter 6  
“Installing, removing, or replacing hardware” on page 83.  
2. If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” this action step is reserved for a  
trained service technician and must be performed only by a trained service technician.  
Action  
Symptom  
The amount of system memory that is displayed is less  
than the total capacity of the installed physical memory  
modules and you suspect a memory module problem.  
1. Make sure that:  
• All memory modules are the correct type  
supported by the server. See “Features” on page  
7.  
• You follow the memory module installation rules.  
See “Memory module installation rules” on page  
90.  
• All memory modules are seated correctly and  
securely.  
• The system firmware is up-to-date.  
2. Run any diagnostic programs to test the memory  
modules.  
3. Reinstall the memory modules.  
4. Replace the suspect memory modules.  
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
Keyboard, mouse, or USB device problems  
Follow the suggested actions for the corresponding symptom in the order in which they are listed until the  
problem is solved. If none of these actions solve the problem, see “Troubleshooting procedure” on page 171  
for the subsequent steps you should check after using the information in this topic.  
Action  
Symptom  
All or some keys on the keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The USB keyboard cable is securely connected  
to a USB connector on the server. If the USB  
keyboard is connected to a USB hub, disconnect  
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly  
to the server.  
• No keys are stuck.  
• The USB controller is enabled in the Setup Utility  
program. See “Using the Setup Utility program”  
on page 55.  
2. Restart the server.  
176 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Action  
3. Replace the keyboard.  
Symptom  
The mouse or pointing device does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The mouse or pointing device cable is securely  
connected to the server. If the USB mouse or  
pointing device is connected to a USB hub,  
disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the  
hub and connect it directly to the server.  
• The mouse or pointing device is clean and no dust  
accumulates.  
• The device drivers are installed correctly.  
• The USB controller is enabled in the Setup Utility  
program. See “Using the Setup Utility program”  
on page 55.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. Replace the mouse or pointing device.  
1. Make sure that:  
A USB device does not work.  
• The USB cable is securely connected to the server.  
If the USB device is connected to a USB hub,  
disconnect the device from the hub and connect  
it directly to the server.  
• The device drivers are installed correctly.  
• The USB controller is enabled in the Setup Utility  
program. See “Using the Setup Utility program”  
on page 55.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. Replace the USB device.  
POST error codes  
Each time you turn on the system, it performs a series of tests that checks the operation of the system and  
options. This series of tests is called the power-on self-test (POST). To assist in troubleshooting a system  
hang during the POST process, the POST code diagnostic LEDs on the system board can be used to  
identify the last POST process executed.  
Note: The POST code diagnostic LEDs and POST error code information are intended only for trained  
service personnel of Lenovo.  
Refer to “System board LEDs” on page 50 for detailed information about the POST code diagnostic LEDs  
and POST error codes.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting and diagnostics 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
178 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. FRU lists  
This chapter lists information about the FRUs.  
Attention: Be sure to read and understand the “Safety information” on page iii before replacing any FRUs.  
In the following tables, a CRU is identified as “1,” “2,” or “N” in the CRU column. “N” means that the part is  
not a CRU, “1” means that the part is a Self-service CRU, and “2” means that the part is an Optional-service  
CRU.  
Note: The server configuration varies by model. The following illustration shows only one type of server  
configuration (server models with up to four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives) to provide a general view  
of the component locations. For more information about the major server configurations, see “Server  
components” on page 25.  
Figure 107. Component locations  
Major FRUs  
The following replaceable components are available for machine types (MTs) 0387, 0388, 0389, 0390,  
0391, 0392, 0393, and 0441.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
DIT kit without label  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
1
03X3668  
03X3573  
71Y5543  
71Y5545  
2
5U front panel kit for LX-KT2 v1.1  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
2
3
3
2
1
1
Optical drive, DVD-ROM drive - 16x/48x (SATA)  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Optical drive, DVD Burner / CD-RW Rambo 8 (SATA)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
180 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Lenovo RDX USB drive bundle bay  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
3
67Y1424  
67Y1421  
67Y1422  
67Y1423  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Lenovo 160 GB RDX USB drive bundle cartridge  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
3
3
3
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Lenovo 320 GB RDX USB drive bundle cartridge  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Lenovo 500 GB RDX USB drive bundle cartridge  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 250 GB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
03X3674  
03X3910  
03X3911  
03X3912  
1
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 500 GB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
4
4
1
1
1
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 1 TB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 2 TB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
182 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Hard disk drive, non-hot-swap, 250 GB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
03X3678  
03X3913  
03X3914  
03X3915  
1
Hard disk drive, non-hot-swap, 500 GB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
4
4
1
1
1
Hard disk drive, non-hot-swap, 1 TB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Hard disk drive, non-hot-swap, 2 TB SATA - enterprise 7200 rpm, 3 Gb/s,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 300 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
03X3916  
03X3917  
03X3918  
03X3919  
1
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 450 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
4
4
1
1
1
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 600 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
3.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 300 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
2.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
184 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 450 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
2.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
03X3920  
1
Hard disk drive, hot-swap, 600 GB SAS - enterprise, 6 Gb/s, xx MB cache,  
2.5-inch drive assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
4
03X3921  
1
Front system fan, second cage 9225 fan  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
5
03X3707  
1
System board CMOS battery  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U 11F  
6
03X3721  
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Heat sink  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
7
03X3710  
03X3624  
03X3625  
03X3626  
1
Microprocessor, Xeon, quad-core, E31280, 8 MB, 3.5 GHz, 95 W  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
8
8
8
2
2
2
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microprocessor, Xeon, quad-core, E31220, 8 MB, 3.1 GHz, 80 W  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G  
Microprocessor, Xeon, quad-core, E31230, 8 MB, 3.2 GHz, 80 W  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO 14U 14G  
186 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Microprocessor, Xeon, quad-core, E31240, 8 MB, 3.3 GHz, 80 W  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
8
03X3627  
03X3628  
03T8011  
03T8010  
2
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO 12U 12G 16U 16G  
Microprocessor, Xeon, quad-core, E31270, 8 MB, 3.4 GHz, 80 W  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
• MT 0390: CTO  
8
8
8
2
2
2
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO 15U 15G  
Microprocessor, Core i3-2100 (3.1 GHz / dual-core / 3 M / 65 W / 1 GT / 1333)  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
• MT 0390: CTO 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G  
• MT 0441: CTO 13U 13G  
Microprocessor, Core i3-2120 (3.3 GHz / dual-core / 3 M / 65 W / 1 GT / 1333)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
System board, CPE SX31000 system board  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
9
03X3665  
46U3197  
03X3948  
03X3800  
N
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
System fan assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
10  
10  
11  
1
1
2
System fan assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
Power supply, GPS-400CB B 400 W ATX power supply, REV:00F  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
188 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Item  
FRU  
CRU  
Power distribution board and cage assembly REV:00 for redundant power  
supplies  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
11  
03X3799  
2
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
Power supply, redundant 450 W power supply module REV:00  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
11  
12  
12  
03X3801  
03X3660  
03X3661  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
Memory module, 2 GB 1RX8 PC3-10600E, ECC-UDIMM DDR3-1333, 2 Gbit  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G  
• MT 0441: CTO 13U 13G  
Memory module, 4 GB 2RX8 PC3-10600E, ECC-UDIMM DDR3-1333, 2 Gbit  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
Mechanical FRUs  
The FRUs listed in the following table are not illustrated.  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRU  
3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive tray V2.0  
FRU number  
CRU  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
3.5-inch non-hot-swap hard disk drive tray V2.0  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
2.5-inch hard disk drive tray V2.0  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
3.5-inch hard disk drive dummy tray V2.0  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3835  
2
03X3842  
03X3836  
03X3837  
2
2
1
190 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
2.5-inch hard disk drive dummy tray V2.0  
FRU number  
CRU  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
3.5-inch hard disk drive cage  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
2.5-inch hard disk drive cage  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
Non-hot-swap hard disk drive cage shield  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3838  
1
03X3703  
03X3704  
03X3722  
2
2
2
Chapter 8. FRU lists 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
Hard disk drive cage, blank, metal, LX-KT2A  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3723  
2
Hot-swap 3.5" x 4 SAS/SATA backplane  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X5999  
03X6000  
03X3712  
2
2
2
Hot-swap 2.5" x 8 SAS/SATA backplane  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
KT2A bezel assembly with label  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
192 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
KT2A side cover assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
KT2A chassis base assembly  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3713  
1
03X3714  
2
KT2A 9225 (38) fan holder  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3717  
2
450 mm (17.72 inches) single to mini-SAS cable 4-1 with one SGPIO port (mini-SAS  
signal cable with four SATA ports and one SGPIO port)  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3705  
1
Chapter 8. FRU lists 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
700 mm (27.56 inches) mini-SAS to mini-SAS signal cable  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
03X3706  
1
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
15u 750 mm (29.53 inches) single SATA cable V1.0  
• MT 0387: CTO, all models  
• MT 0388: CTO, all models  
• MT 0389: CTO, all models  
• MT 0390: CTO, all models  
• MT 0391: CTO, all models  
• MT 0392: CTO, all models  
• MT 0393: CTO, all models  
• MT 0441: CTO, all models  
03X3696  
1
Lenovo RDX USB drive bundle cables  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
67Y1425  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Adapters and miscellaneous FRUs  
The following table lists information about adapters and miscellaneous FRUs.  
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
Pro/1000 PT dual port Ethernet card  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
67Y1430  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
194 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
• MT 0441: CTO  
ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 0/1 Adapter, eight ports without RAID 5 Upgrade Key B2  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3634  
1
ThinkServer 9240-8i RAID 5 Upgrade Key  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
03X3604  
03X3666  
03X3667  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Remote Management Module V1.0  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Onboard SATA Software RAID 5 Key  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
FRU number  
CRU  
TPM Module V1.1  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
03X3709  
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 11G 12U 12G 13U 13G 14U 14G 15U 15G 16U 16G  
2-pin 200 mm (7.87 inches) RAID card to system board hard disk drive LED cable  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3757  
1
Power cords  
For your safety, Lenovo provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use with this Lenovo  
product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded outlet.  
Lenovo power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and  
certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).  
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set consisting of a  
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel  
blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set  
consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length  
and a tandem blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set with a grounding-type  
attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the  
equipment will be installed.  
Lenovo power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that country or region.  
196 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FRU  
number  
Primary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - United States  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 12U  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
41R3184  
41R3256  
24R2633  
45J9595  
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 12U 13U  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 12U  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U 16U  
Power cord - China  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Japan  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Brazil  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
1
1
1
Chapter 8. FRU lists 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Primary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - LA (High Voltage) Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3176  
41R3196  
41R3260  
41R3224  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Australia and New Zealand  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Korea  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia, Brunei, United Kingdom, Ireland  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
198 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Primary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - Taiwan  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3278  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Italy  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3232  
1
1
1
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - Indonesia, Laos, Cambodia, Vietnam, Austria, Belgium, Croatia,  
Czechoslovakia, Finland, France, Germany, Hungary, Netherlands, Norway, Poland,  
Portugal, Romania, Spain, Sweden  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3208  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Denmark  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3212  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Primary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - Switzerland  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3228  
41R3236  
41R3220  
41R3341  
1
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - Israel  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - South Africa  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - India  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
200 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Secondary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - United States  
• MT 0387: CTO 11U 12U  
• MT 0388: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U  
• MT 0389: CTO 11U  
41R3184  
41R3256  
24R2633  
45J9595  
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11U 12U 13U  
• MT 0391: CTO 11U  
• MT 0392: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U  
• MT 0393: CTO 11U 12U  
• MT 0441: CTO 11U 12U 13U 14U 15U 16U  
Power cord - China  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Japan  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Brazil  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
1
1
1
Chapter 8. FRU lists 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Secondary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - LA (High Voltage) Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3176  
41R3196  
41R3260  
41R3224  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Australia and New Zealand  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Korea  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia, Brunei, United Kingdom, Ireland  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
202 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Secondary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - Taiwan  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3278  
1
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Italy  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3232  
1
1
1
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - Indonesia, Laos, Cambodia, Vietnam, Austria, Belgium, Croatia,  
Czechoslovakia, Finland, France, Germany, Hungary, Netherlands, Norway, Poland,  
Portugal, Romania, Spain, Sweden  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
41R3208  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Power cord - Denmark  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3212  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU  
number  
Secondary power cord  
CRU  
Power cord - Switzerland  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
41R3228  
41R3236  
41R3220  
41R3341  
1
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - Israel  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
1
1
1
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - South Africa  
• MT 0387: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0388: CTO 12G 13G  
• MT 0389: CTO 11G  
• MT 0390: CTO 11G 12G 13G  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO 11G 12G  
• MT 0441: CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G 16G  
Power cord - India  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Shipgroup  
The Lenovo shipgroup for a specific country or region is usually available only in that country or region.  
204 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Documentation DVD (English)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3656  
1
Documentation DVD (multilingual)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3658  
03X3946  
90Y1183  
1
1
1
EasyStartup DVD (multilingual)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Server® 2008 R2 (64-bit) shipgroup US  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Standard Edition (English)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3777  
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Standard Edition (French)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3778  
03X3779  
03X3780  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Standard Edition (German)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Standard Edition (Japanese)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
206 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Premium Add-on (English)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3781  
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Premium Add-on (French)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3782  
03X3783  
03X3784  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Premium Add-on (German)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Premium Add-on (Japanese)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Essentials (English)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3785  
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Essentials (French)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
03X3786  
03X3787  
03X3788  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Essentials (German)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2011 Essentials (Japanese)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
208 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (French)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1184  
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (German)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1185  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (Spanish)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (Italian)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (Turkish)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1189  
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition (64-bit) (Dutch)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (English)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (Dutch)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
210 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (French)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1193  
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (German)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1197  
1
1
1
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (Italian)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (Spanish)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
Chapter 8. FRU lists 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipgroup  
FRU number  
CRU  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition (64-bit) (Turkish)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1198  
1
Reseller Option Kit (ROK) - Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Foundations (64-bit)  
(multilingual: English, Japanese)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1199  
1
ROK - Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Foundations (64-bit) (multilingual: English,  
French, German, Italian, Spanish)  
• MT 0387: CTO  
• MT 0388: CTO  
• MT 0389: CTO  
• MT 0390: CTO  
• MT 0391: CTO  
• MT 0392: CTO  
• MT 0393: CTO  
• MT 0441: CTO  
90Y1200  
1
212 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9. Getting information, help, and service  
This chapter contains information about help, service, and technical assistance for products manufactured  
by Lenovo and where to go for additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo products.  
Information resources  
You can use the information in this topic to access useful resources relating to your needs when using  
the product.  
Using the documentation  
Information about your Lenovo system and installed software, if any, or optional device is available in the  
documentation that comes with the product. The documentation can include printed documents, online  
documents, readme files, and help files. Most of the documentation for your server is on the documentation  
DVD provided with your server.  
The Hardware Maintenance Manual is kept updating and the most up-to-date version is always available in  
English on the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkServerUserGuides  
Lenovo maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information and  
download documentation or device drivers and updates. To access the Lenovo Support Web site, go to:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
For more information about your server documentation, see “Server documentation” on page 1.  
If you suspect a software problem, refer to the documentation, including readme files and online help, that  
comes with the operating system or software program.  
ThinkServer Web site (http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver)  
The ThinkServer Web site provides up-to-date information and services to help you buy, use, upgrade, and  
maintain your server. You can also do the following:  
• Shop for servers as well as upgrades and accessories for your server.  
• Purchase additional services and software.  
• Purchase upgrades and extended hardware repair services.  
• Access the Lenovo Limited Warranty (LLW).  
• Access the online manuals for your products.  
• Access troubleshooting and support information for your server model and other supported products.  
• Download the latest device drivers and software updates for your server model.  
• Find the service and support phone numbers for your country or region.  
• Find a Service Provider located near you.  
Lenovo Support Web site  
Technical support information is available on the Lenovo Support Web site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
This portal is updated with the latest information about the following subjects:  
Download Drivers & Software  
Diagnose & Fix  
Download drivers, flash the BIOS, and update your  
software.  
Use self-diagnostic tools to diagnose the problem  
yourself, search community boards, or work with our  
Virtual Agent to answer questions.  
Product & Service Warranty  
Product & Parts Detail  
Check your warranty status and upgrade your warranty.  
Find part numbers for replacement parts, learn how to  
replace parts, and view other parts information related  
to your product.  
Read or download the documentation related to your  
product.  
User Guides & Manuals  
Research & Learn  
Search the community knowledge base for your computer  
to share and discover information with other users.  
Help and service  
This topic contains information about obtaining help and service.  
Before you call  
Before you call, do the following to try to solve the problem by yourself:  
• Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.  
• Check the power switches to make sure that the system and optional devices are turned on.  
• Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation on the documentation DVD that  
comes with your product.  
• Check for the updated information, new device drivers, and hints and tips on the Lenovo Support Web  
site at:  
http://support.lenovo.com  
If possible, be at your product when you call. Have the following information available:  
• Machine type and model  
• Serial numbers of your Lenovo hardware products  
• Description of the problem  
• Exact wording of any error messages  
• Hardware and software configuration information  
Calling for service  
During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support  
Center.  
The following services are available during the warranty period:  
• Problem determination - Trained service personnel are available to assist you with determining a  
hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem.  
• Hardware repair - If the problem is caused by hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are  
available to provide the applicable level of service.  
214 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Engineering Change management - There might be changes that are required after a product has  
been sold. Lenovo or your reseller will make selected Engineering Changes (ECs) that apply to your  
hardware available.  
The warranty does not cover the following:  
• Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or non-warranted Lenovo parts  
• Identification of software problem sources  
• Configuration of the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) as part of an installation or upgrade  
• Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers  
• Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)  
• Installation and maintenance of application programs  
For the warranty type and duration for your product, refer to the Warranty and Support Information on  
the documentation DVD that comes with you server. You must retain your proof of purchase to obtain  
warranty service.  
For warranty service, consult the worldwide Lenovo Support telephone list. Telephone numbers are subject  
to change without notice. The most up-to-date telephone list for Lenovo Support is always available on the  
Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. If the telephone number for your country or region is not  
listed, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative.  
Using other services  
If you travel with a Lenovo notebook computer or relocate your computer to a country where your desktop,  
notebook, or server machine type is sold, your computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service,  
which automatically entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will be  
performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service.  
Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be available in all countries.  
International Warranty Service is delivered through the method of service (such as depot, carry-in, or  
on-site service) that is provided in the servicing country. Service centers in certain countries might not be  
able to service all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions might  
apply at the time of service.  
To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service and to view a list of the  
countries where service is available, go to http://support.lenovo.com, click Product & Service Warranty,  
and follow the instructions on the Web page.  
For technical assistance with the installation of or questions related to Service Packs for  
your installed Windows product, refer to the Microsoft Product Support Services Web site at  
http://support.microsoft.com/directory or you can contact the Customer Support Center. Some fees might  
apply.  
Purchasing additional services  
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as support for hardware,  
operating systems, and application programs; network setup and configuration services; upgraded or  
extended hardware repair services; and custom installation services. Service availability and service name  
might vary by country or region. For more information about these services, go to the Lenovo Web site at:  
http://www.lenovo.com  
Chapter 9. Getting information, help, and service 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
216 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Notices  
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult  
your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your  
area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that  
Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service  
that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's  
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service.  
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this  
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send  
license inquiries, in writing, to:  
Lenovo (United States), Inc.  
1009 Think Place - Building One  
Morrisville, NC 27560  
U.S.A.  
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing  
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply  
to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically  
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.  
Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this  
publication at any time without notice.  
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support  
applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this  
document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document  
shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo  
or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is  
presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary.  
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without  
incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in  
any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of  
the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result  
obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been  
made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same  
on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through  
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their  
specific environment.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trademarks  
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, ThinkServer, and ThinkVantage are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States,  
other countries, or both.  
Intel, Intel Core, and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or  
both.  
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other factors also affect  
application performance.  
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often less than the possible  
maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume, KB stands for 1 024 bytes,  
MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for 1 073 741 824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands for 1 000 000 bytes,  
and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible capacity can vary depending on operating  
environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any standard hard disk drives  
and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest currently supported drives that are available  
from Lenovo.  
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an optional memory module.  
Lenovo makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-Lenovo products. Support (if any) for  
the non-Lenovo products is provided by the third party, not Lenovo.  
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include user manuals or all  
program functionality.  
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) cable and cord notice  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product  
will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.  
Recycling information  
Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment  
when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in  
recycling their IT products. For information on recycling Lenovo products, go to:  
http://www.lenovo.com/recycling  
218 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor  
If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property  
of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of  
Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed  
of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law  
for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting  
and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For  
details, visit the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan. Pursuant to the Law for  
Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-used computers  
and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of  
charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at  
http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan.  
Disposing of Lenovo computer components  
Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other  
environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit  
board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor.  
Battery return program  
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for  
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may  
not be available in your area. For information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/recycling or contact your local waste disposal facility.  
Battery recycling information for Taiwan  
Appendix A. Notices 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery recycling information for the European Union  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC  
concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the  
framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the  
European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown  
away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate  
that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also  
include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for  
cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted  
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and  
treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential  
effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of  
hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to:  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment  
Requirement for batteries containing perchlorate  
The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A.  
California Perchlorate Information:  
Products containing CR (manganese dioxide) lithium coin cell batteries may contain perchlorate.  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4.5  
Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials. This product/part may include a lithium  
manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlorate substance.  
Particulate contamination  
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive gases acting alone or in  
combination with other environmental factors such as humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the  
server that is described in this document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate  
levels or concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the server to malfunction or  
cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for particulates and gases that are intended  
to avoid such damage. The limits must not be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous  
other factors, such as temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates  
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of specific limits that are  
set forth in this document, you must implement practices that maintain particulate and gas levels that are  
consistent with the protection of human health and safety. If Lenovo determines that the levels of particulates  
220 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
or gases in your environment have caused damage to the server, Lenovo may condition provision of repair  
or replacement of servers or parts on implementation of appropriate remedial measures to mitigate such  
environmental contamination. Implementation of such remedial measures is a customer responsibility.  
Table 1. Limits for particulates and gases  
Contaminant  
Limits  
Particulate  
• The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust spot efficiency  
(MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.  
• Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or greater, using  
high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet MIL-STD-282.  
• The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination must be more than 60%2.  
• The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc whiskers.  
Gaseous  
• Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853  
• Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days  
1 ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle  
Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.  
2 The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at which the dust absorbs  
enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.  
3
ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control systems: Airborne  
contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, U.S.A.  
Important information for the European Directive 2002/96/EC  
EU Only  
The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) mark applies only to countries within the European  
Union (EU) and Norway. Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC  
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for  
the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is  
applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon  
end of life per this Directive. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking per  
Annex IV of the WEEE Directive must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the  
collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, recovery of WEEE and minimize any potential  
effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. For  
additional WEEE information go to:  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment  
Le marquage des déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques (DEEE) s'applique uniquement aux  
pays de l'Union européenne (EU) et à la Norvège. Les appareils sont marqués conformément à la Directive  
2002/96/CE du Conseil Européen relative aux déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques (DEEE).  
Cette directive, applicable à l'ensemble des pays de l'Union européenne, concerne la collecte et le recyclage  
des appareils usagés. Ce marquage est apposé sur différents produits pour indiquer que ces derniers  
ne doivent pas être jetés, mais récupérés en fin de vie, conformément à cette directive. Les utilisateurs  
Appendix A. Notices 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
d'équipements électriques et électroniques portant le marquage DEEE, conformément à l'Annexe IV de la  
Directive DEEE, ne doivent pas mettre au rebut ces équipements comme des déchets municipaux non triés,  
mais ils doivent utiliser la structure de collecte mise à disposition des clients pour le retour, le recyclage et la  
récupération des déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques, afin de réduire tout effet potentiel  
des équipements électriques et électroniques sur l'environnement et la santé en raison de la présence  
possible de substances dangereuses dans ces équipements. Pour plus d'informations sur les équipements  
électriques et électroniques, consultez le site http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
Die WEEE-Kennzeichnung gilt nur in Ländern der Europäischen Union und in Norwegen. Geräte werden  
gemäß der Richtlinie 2002/96/EC der Europäischen Union über Elektro- und Elektronikaltgeräte (WEEE)  
gekennzeichnet. Die Richtlinie regelt die Rückgabe und Wiederverwertung von Altgeräten innerhalb der  
Europäischen Union. Mit dieser Kennzeichnung versehene Altgeräte dürfen gemäß dieser Richtlinie  
nicht weggeworfen werden, sondern müssen zurückgegeben werden. Anwender von Elektro- und  
Elektronikgeräten mit der WEEE-Kennzeichnung dürfen diese gemäß Annex IV der WEEE-Richtlinie nach  
ihrem Gebrauch nicht als allgemeinen Hausmüll entsorgen. Stattdessen müssen diese Geräte im verfügbaren  
Sammelsystem zurückgegeben werden und damit einem Recycling- oder Wiederherstellungsprozess  
zugeführt werden, bei dem mögliche Auswirkungen der Geräte auf die Umwelt und den menschlichen  
Organismus aufgrund gefährlicher Substanzen minimiert werden. Weitere Informationen zur Entsorgung von  
Elektro- und Elektronikaltgeräten finden Sie unter der Adresse: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
La marca de Residuos de equipos eléctricos y electrónicos (WEEE) se aplica sólo a los países pertenecientes  
a la Unión Europea (UE) y a Noruega. Los aparatos se etiquetan conforme a la Directiva Europea 2002/96/EC  
relativa a los residuos de equipos eléctricos y electrónicos (WEEE). La directiva determina el marco para  
devolver y reciclar los aparatos usados según sea aplicable en toda la Unión Europea. Esta etiqueta se  
aplica a varios productos para indicar que el producto no se va a desechar, sino que va ser reclamado por  
esta Directiva, una vez termine su ciclo de vida. Los usuarios de los equipos eléctricos y electrónicos (EEE)  
con la marca WEEE por el Anexo IV de la Directiva WEEE no deben tratar los EEE como desperdicios  
municipales no clasificados, una vez terminado su ciclo de vida, sino que deben utilizar el marco de recogida  
disponible para devolver, reciclar y recuperar los WEEE y minimizar los posibles efectos de los EEE en el  
medio ambiente y en la salud debidos a la presencia de substancias peligrosas. Para obtener información  
adicional acerca de WEEE consulte el sitio: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
Il marchio WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) viene applicato soltanto ai paesi all'interno  
dell'unione europea (EU) e norvegia. Le apparecchiature vengono etichettate in accordo con la direttiva  
europea 2002/96/EC riguardande lo smaltimento di apparecchiatura elettrica ed alettronica (WEEE). Le  
direttive determinano la procedura di restituzione e di riciclaggio delle apparecchiature usate in conformità  
con le normative dell'unione europea. Questa classificazione viene applicata a vari prodotti per indicare che  
il prodotto stesso non deve essere gettato ma riscattato al termine dell'utilizzo per quasta direttiva. Gli utenti  
di apparecchiature elettriche o elettroniche (EEE) marchiate WEEE secondo Annex IV della direttiva WEEE  
non devono disporre di fine utilizzo EEE come rifiuto, municipale non classificato, ma deve essere utilizzata  
la procedura di classificazione disponibile per il riscatto, riciclo, recupero del WEEE e minimizzare qualsiasi  
potenziale effetto della EEE sull'ambiente e sulla salute umana dovuto alla presenza di sostanze pericolose.  
Per ulteriori informazioni sulla WEEE visitare il sito: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
A marca REEE (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos) aplica-se apenas aos Estados  
Membros da União Europeia e à Noruega. Os aparelhos eléctricos deverão ser identificados em  
conformidade com a Directiva Europeia 2002/96/CE relativa a REEE (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos  
e Electrónicos). A Directiva determina o enquadramento normativo relativamente à devolução e reciclagem  
de aparelhos eléctricos utilizados, conforme aplicável no espaço da União Europeia. Esta etiqueta  
deverá ser aposta em diversos produtos para indicar que os mesmos não poderão ser deitados fora,  
mas sim recuperados no final da respectiva vida útil, de acordo com a referida Directiva. Os utilizadores  
de equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos (EEE) com a marca REEE em conformidade com o Anexo IV da  
Directiva REEE não poderão deitar fora os EEE no final da respectiva vida útil como lixo municipal não  
separado, devendo sim utilizar a estrutura de recolha que lhes tenha sido disponibilizada para efeitos de  
devolução, reciclagem e recuperação de REEE, por forma a minimizar potenciais efeitos dos EEE sobre  
222 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
o ambiente e saúde pública resultantes da presença de substâncias perigosas. Para obter informações  
adicionais acerca da REEE consulte o sítio da web: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
Het WEEE-merkteken (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) geldt alleen voor landen binnen de  
Europese Unie (EU) en Noorwegen. Apparaten worden van een merkteken voorzien overeenkomstig  
Europese Richtlijn 2002/96/EC inzake afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparatuur (waste electrical  
and electronic equipment, WEEE). Deze richtlijn bepaalt het raamwerk voor het retourneren en recyclen van  
gebruikte apparatuur, zoals van toepassing binnen de Europese Unie. Dit merkteken wordt aangebracht op  
diverse producten om aan te geven dat het product in kwestie niet dient te worden weggegooid, maar dat  
het aan het eind van de levenscyclus krachtens deze Richtlijn dient te worden geretourneerd. Gebruikers van  
elektrische en elektronische apparaten (EEE) welke zijn voorzien van het WEEE-merkteken zijn gehouden  
aan Annex IV van de WEEE Richtlijn en mogen gebruikte EEE niet weggooien als ongesorteerd afval, maar  
dienen gebruik te maken van het inzamelproces voor het teruggeven, recyclen en terugwinnen van WEEE  
dat voor hen beschikbaar is, en dienen de mogelijke effecten die EEE ten gevolge van de aanwezigheid van  
schadelijke stoffen kunnen hebben op het milieu en de volksgezondheid, tot een minimum te beperken. Voor  
meer informatie over WEEE gaat u naar: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
WEEE-mærkningen (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) gælder kun for lande i EU samt Norge.  
Udstyr mærkes i henhold til EU's direktiv 2002/96/EF om affald af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr (WEEE).  
Direktivet fastlægger de rammer, der gælder for returnering og genbrug af brugt udstyr i EU. Mærkaten  
påsættes forskellige produkter for at angive, at produktet ikke må smides væk, når det er udtjent, men skal  
genvindes i henhold til dette direktiv. Brugere af elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr (EEE), der er mærket med  
WEEE-mærket som angivet i Bilag IV til WEEE-direktivet, må ikke bortskaffe brugt EEE som usorteret  
husholdningsaffald, men skal bruge den indsamlingsordning, der er etableret, så WEEE kan returneres,  
genbruges eller genvindes. Formålet er at minimere den eventuelle påvirkning af miljøet og menneskers  
sundhed som følge af tilstedeværelsen af skadelige stoffer. Der er flere oplysninger om affald af elektrisk og  
elektronisk udstyr på adressen http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
Sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromu (Waste electrical and electronic equipment, WEEE) -merkintä koskee vain  
Euroopan unionin (EU) jäsenmaita ja Norjaa. Sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaitteet merkitään Euroopan parlamentin  
ja neuvoston direktiivin 2002/96/EY mukaisesti. Kyseinen direktiivi määrittää Euroopan Unionin alueella  
käytössä olevat palautus- ja kierrätyskäytännöt. WEEE-merkintä laitteessa osoittaa, että direktiivin ohjeiden  
mukaan tuotetta ei tulisi hävittää sen elinkaaren päässä, vaan se tulee toimittaa uusiokäyttöön. Käyttäjien,  
joiden sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaitteissa on tämä sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun direktiivin liitteen IV  
mukainen merkintä, tulee kierrättää kyseiset laitteet käytettävissä olevien resurssien mukaan ja varmistaa,  
että niistä tai niissä käytetyistä materiaaleista ei aiheudu haittaa ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle. Sähkö-  
ja elektroniikkalaitteita ei saa hävittää sekajätteen mukana. Lisätietoja sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaiteromun  
uusiokäytöstä on WWW-sivustossa http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
WEEE-merket (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) gjelder bare for land i Den europeiske union  
(EU) og Norge. Utstyr merkes i henhold til EU-direktiv 2002/96/EF om avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk  
utstyr (WEEE). Direktivet fastsetter rammene for retur og resirkulering av brukt utstyr innenfor EU. Dette  
merket benyttes på forskjellige produkter for å angi at produktet ikke må kastes, men må behandles i  
henhold til dette direktivet ved slutten av produktets levetid. Brukere av elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr  
(EEE) som er merket med WEEE-merket ifølge vedlegg IV i WEEE-direktivet, må ikke kaste utstyret som  
usortert husholdningsavfall, men må bruke de tilgjengelige innsamlingssystemene for retur, resirkulering og  
gjenvinning av kassert elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr for å redusere en eventuell skadelig virkning av elektrisk  
og elektronisk utstyr på miljø og helse, som skyldes skadelige stoffer. Du finner mer informasjon om WEEE  
på denne adressen: http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
Appendix A. Notices 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS)  
This topic provides statements about the Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS).  
224 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
China RoHS  
Turkish statement of compliance  
The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use  
of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).  
Appendix A. Notices 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement  
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according to clause 2 of the  
German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der  
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.  
Electronic emission notices  
The following information refers to the Lenovo ThinkServer machine types 0387, 0388, 0389, 0390, 0391,  
0392, 0393, and 0441.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant  
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction  
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits.  
Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than specified or  
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.  
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to public  
telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
226 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the  
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot  
accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology  
Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for  
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference  
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
German Class A compliance statement  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit  
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) zur  
Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten  
und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu  
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden.  
Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt  
ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne  
Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
Deutschland:  
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmittein  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln“  
EMVG (früher „Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten“). Dies ist die Umsetzung der  
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geräten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für  
Geräte der Klasse A.  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen  
- CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo  
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.  
Nach der EN 55022: „Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich  
Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen  
durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.“  
Appendix A. Notices 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nach dem EMVG: „Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört sind, nur mit besonderer  
Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und  
Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen  
Störungen zu erwarten sind.“ (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4). Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren  
ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93)  
kostenpflichtig.  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Handbüchern  
angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference  
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Korea Class A compliance statement  
Japan VCCI Class A compliance statement  
Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current  
less than or equal to 20 A per phase  
China Class A compliance statement  
Taiwan Class A compliance statement  
Lenovo product service information for Taiwan  
228 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
locations 37  
removing 92  
DIT module  
3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
locations 35  
installing 112  
locations 18  
removing 113  
DIT panel  
A
LED 18  
locations 18  
documentation  
using 213  
downloading  
the BIOS update utility program 67  
about RAID 72  
Advanced menu  
Setup Utility program 57  
advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID  
configuring 79  
ambient temperature over limit LED  
LED 19  
E
EasyUpdate Firmware Updater program  
using 81  
error  
B
BIOS and BMC firmware update  
software 13  
LED 19  
BMC status  
Ethernet card  
LED 51  
installing 96  
Boot Manager menu  
Setup Utility program 64  
Boot Options menu  
Setup Utility program 62  
removing 97  
Ethernet connectivity  
features  
9
Ethernet controllers  
configuring 80  
Ethernet status  
LED 22  
C
cables  
Exit menu  
Setup Utility program 64  
exiting  
connecting 38  
configuring  
Setup Utility program 67  
expansion slots  
Ethernet controllers 80  
server 55  
configuring RAID  
features  
9
advanced SATA or SAS hardware RAID 79  
onboard SATA software RAID 74  
using the ThinkServer EasyStartup program 74  
configuring the server 55  
connecting  
cables 38  
considerations, password 65  
consistency check  
F
fans  
features  
features  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program 70  
firmware  
updating 80  
flashing  
the BIOS 68  
front bezel  
8
7
running 78  
contamination, particulate and gaseous 220  
creating, adding, or deleting  
RAID array 76  
CRU  
reinstalling 87  
removing 87  
completing the replacement 168  
front panel  
LED 17  
locations 17  
front panel board assembly  
replacing 147  
front system fan  
replacing 149  
D
devices, handling static-sensitive 84  
DIMM  
installation rules 90  
installing 91  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
front view of the server  
locations 15  
iKVM key 106  
memory module 91  
FRU lists 179  
non-hot-swap hard disk drive 128  
optical drive 115  
PCI card 93  
RAID 5 key on the RAID card 100  
RAID card 98  
server cover 168  
system board RAID 5 key 102  
TPM module 109  
G
gaseous contamination 220  
German gloss statement 226  
getting help 213  
getting information 213  
getting service 213  
installing and using  
MegaRAID Storage Manager program 79  
interface  
guidelines 83  
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program 75  
Setup Utility program 56  
internal drives  
H
hard disk drive status  
LED 18  
features  
9
hardware  
installing 83  
removing 83  
replacing 83  
L
LED  
ambient temperature over limit LED 19  
BMC status 51  
heat sink and fan assembly  
replacing 154  
DIT panel 18  
error 19  
help, getting 213  
hot-spare drive  
Ethernet status 22  
setting 77  
front panel 17  
hot-swap hard disk drive  
installing 119  
replacing 119  
hot-swap hard disk drive backplane  
locations 34  
hard disk drive status 18  
hot-swap hard disk drive status 32  
hot-swap redundant power supply module status 21  
NIC status 18  
optical drive status 16  
POST code diagnostic 51  
power status 17  
replacing 133  
hot-swap hard disk drive status  
LED 32  
system board 50  
system board hardware fault 50  
system status 18  
hot-swap hard disk drive status LEDs  
locations 32  
hot-swap redundant power supply module  
replacing 140  
locations 13  
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program  
interface 75  
hot-swap redundant power supply module status  
LED 21  
starting 74  
I
M
iKVM key  
installing 106  
removing 107  
information, getting 213  
initializing  
virtual drive 77  
Input/Output (I/O)  
machine type and model label  
locations 13  
Main menu  
Setup Utility program 56  
MegaRAID Storage Manager program  
installing and using 79  
memory  
features  
9
installation rules  
DIMM 90  
memory module 90  
installing  
features  
8
memory module  
installation rules 90  
installing 91  
DIMM 91  
removing 92  
DIT module 112  
Ethernet card 96  
hardware 83  
memory module installation  
guidelines 90  
microprocessor  
hot-swap hard disk drive 119  
features  
8
230 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
replacing 157  
RAID array  
creating, adding, or deleting 76  
RAID card  
installing 98  
N
NIC status  
locations 33  
removing 99  
LED 18  
RAID configuration utilities  
software 13  
non-hot-swap hard disk drive  
installing 128  
rear system fan  
removing 124  
replacing 152  
rear view of the server  
locations 19  
non-hot-swap power supply assembly  
replacing 137  
rebuilding  
physical drive 78  
recovering  
the BIOS 68  
reinstalling  
front bezel 87  
O
onboard SATA software RAID  
configuring 74  
optical drive  
installing 115  
reliability, availability, and serviceability  
features 10  
removing  
DIMM 92  
DIT module 113  
replacing 115  
optical drive status  
LED 16  
option  
completing the replacement 168  
Ethernet card 97  
front bezel 87  
P
hardware 83  
iKVM key 107  
particulate contamination 220  
parts replacement, completing 168  
password  
memory module 92  
non-hot-swap hard disk drive 124  
PCI card 95  
RAID 5 key on the RAID card 101  
RAID card 99  
server cover 85  
system board RAID 5 key 104  
TPM module 110  
considerations 65  
setting, changing, deleting 65  
Setup Utility program 65  
PC-Doctor for DOS  
software 13  
troubleshooting and diagnostics 172  
PCI card  
replacing  
front panel board assembly 147  
front system fan 149  
hardware 83  
installing 93  
removing 95  
physical drive  
heat sink and fan assembly 154  
hot-swap hard disk drive 119  
hot-swap hard disk drive backplane 133  
hot-swap redundant power supply module 140  
microprocessor 157  
non-hot-swap power supply assembly 137  
optical drive 115  
rebuilding 78  
POST code diagnostic  
LED 51  
power distribution board and cage assembly  
replacing 143  
power status  
LED 17  
power distribution board and cage assembly 143  
rear system fan 152  
system board 162  
system board battery 161  
road map  
power supply  
features  
precautions  
guidelines 83  
8
server setup  
running  
consistency check 78  
5
R
RAID  
configuring 71  
for your server 73  
introduction 72  
S
RAID 5 key on the RAID card  
installing 100  
security  
front door lock 25  
removing 101  
integrated cable lock 24  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
padlock 23  
Security menu  
system date  
setting 64  
Setup Utility program 60  
serial number label  
locations 13  
server components  
locations 25  
system event log  
troubleshooting and diagnostics 172  
system reliability  
guidelines 84  
system status  
server configuration  
updating 170  
server cover  
LED 18  
system time  
setting 64  
installing 168  
removing 85  
server documentation  
server locks  
locations 22  
Server Management menu  
Setup Utility program 61  
1
T
the BIOS  
flashing 68  
recovering 68  
updating 68  
server package  
server setup  
7
updating or recovering 67  
the BIOS update utility program  
downloading 67  
ThinkServer EasyStartup  
software 12  
road map  
5
service, getting 213  
setting  
hot-spare drive 77  
setting, changing, deleting  
password 65  
Setup Utility program  
exiting 67  
interface 56  
password 65  
starting 55  
TPM 66  
using 55  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
features 70  
starting 70  
using 69  
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater  
software 13  
ThinkServer Web address  
TPM  
Setup Utility program 66  
TPM module  
1
software 12  
specifications 12  
starting  
installing 109  
removing 110  
troubleshooting and diagnostics  
hard disk drive problems 174  
keyboard, mouse, or USB device problems 176  
memory module problems 176  
optical drive problems 173  
PC-Doctor for DOS 172  
POST error codes 177  
status and diagnostic LEDs 171  
system event log 172  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program problems 172  
troubleshooting procedure 171  
turning off the server 53  
turning on the server 53  
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility program 74  
Setup Utility program 55  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program 70  
startup device  
selecting 66  
Setup Utility program 66  
static-sensitive devices  
guidelines 84  
static-sensitive devices, handling 84  
system board 42  
LED 50  
replacing 162  
system board battery  
replacing 161  
TÜV gloss statement 226  
system board components  
locations 42  
system board hardware fault  
LED 50  
U
updating  
system board jumpers  
locations 46  
system board LEDs  
locations 50  
system board RAID 5 key  
installing 102  
removing 104  
firmware 80  
server configuration 170  
the BIOS 68  
updating or recovering  
the BIOS 67  
using  
documentation 213  
232 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EasyUpdate Firmware Updater program 81  
passwords 65  
Setup Utility program 55  
ThinkServer EasyStartup program 69  
V
video subsystem  
features  
9
viewing information  
Setup Utility program 55  
virtual drive  
initializing 77  
W
Web site  
compatible options 89  
working inside the server with the power on  
guidelines 85  
© Copyright Lenovo 2011  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234 ThinkServer Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Kyocera Satellite Radio KM NET User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio Flat Panel Television SV7TV User Manual
Lennox International Inc Furnace El195Uh User Manual
Lowrance electronic Marine GPS System X 16 User Manual
Makita Cordless Saw 5092D User Manual
Makita Home Safety Product ML140 User Manual
Marantz CD Player DR4050 User Manual
Maytag Clothes Dryer MDG75MNV User Manual
Maytag Range W10392923C User Manual
Maytag Refrigerator W10175446B User Manual